Reference numbers are shown at the bottom left corner on the back cover of each manual.

Transcription

1 V Series

2 Record of Revisions Reference numbers are shown at the bottom left corner on the back cover of each manual. Printing Date Reference No. Revised Contents February, NE0 First edition October, NE0a only in PDF file January, 00 00NE Second edition October, 00 00NE Third edition

3

4 Preface Thank you for selecting the MONITOUCH V series. For correct set-up of the V series, you are requested to read through this manual to understand more about the product. For more information about the V series, refer to the following related manuals. Manual Contents Reference No. Reference Manual (Operation) The V-SFT operating procedure is described. 04NE Reference Manual (Function) V Hardware Specifications V06 Hardware Specifications Temperature Control Network Specifications for CC-LINK Communication Unit Specifications for PROFIBUS Communication Unit Connection with AB Control Logix M-CARD SFT Operation Manual V-SFT Additional Specifications Ladder Monitor Specifications The functions and instructions of the V/V6 series are explained. Notes on usage and hardware specifications for the V series are described. Notes on usage and hardware specifications for the V06 are described. The temperature control network function is explained. Instructions for CC-LINK are contained. Instructions for PROFIBUS are contained. The connection, communication parameters and tag setting for AB Control Logix are explained. The operating procedure of the memory card editor is described. Additional specifications for the Reference Manual are explained. Instructions for the ladder monitor function are contained. 044NE 00NE 0NE 0NE 0NE 06NE 04NE 0NE 044NE 04NE For further details about PLCs (programmable logic controllers), see the manual attached to each PLC. Notes:. This manual may not, in whole or in part, be printed or reproduced without the prior written consent of Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd.. The information in this manual is subject to change without prior notice.. Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. 4. All other company names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.. This manual is intended to give accurate information about MONITOUCH hardware. If you have any questions, please contact your local distributor.

5

6 Notes on Safe Use of MONITOUCH In this manual, you will find various notes categorized under the following levels with the signal words DANGER, and CAUTION. DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and could cause property damage. Note that there is a possibility that the item listed with CAUTION may have serious ramifications. DANGER Never use the input function of MONITOUCH for operations that may threaten human life or to damage the system, such as switches to be used in case of emergency. Please design the system so that it can cope with malfunction of a touch switch. A malfunction of the touch switch will result in machine accident or damage. Turn off the power supply when you set up the unit, connect cables or perform maintenance and inspection. Otherwise, electrical shock or damage may occur. Never touch any terminals while the power is on. Otherwise, electric shock may occur. You must put a cover on the terminals on the unit when you turn the power on and operate the unit. Without the terminal cover in place, an electric shock may occur. The liquid crystal in the LCD panel is a hazardous substance. If the LCD panel is damaged, never swallow the leaked liquid crystal. If the liquid crystal spills on your skin or clothing, use soap and wash off thoroughly. For MONITOUCH using a lithium battery, never disassemble, recharge, deform by pressure, short-circuit, nor reverse the polarity of the battery, and never dispose of the battery in fire. Failure to follow these conditions will lead to explosion or ignition. For MONITOUCH using a lithium battery, never use a battery that is deformed, leaks, or shows any other signs of abnormality. Failure to follow these conditions will lead to explosion or ignition.

7 CAUTION Check the appearance of the unit when it is unpacked. Do not use the unit if any damage or deformation is found. Failure to do so may lead to fire, damage or malfunction. For use in a facility or for a system related to nuclear energy, aerospace, medical, traffic equipment, or mobile installations, please consult your local distributor. Operate (or store) MONITOUCH under the conditions indicated in this manual and related manuals. Failure to do so could cause fire, malfunction, physical damage or deterioration. Understand the following environmental limits for use and storage of MONITOUCH. Otherwise, fire or damage to the unit may result. - Avoid locations where there is a possibility that water, corrosive gas, flammable gas, solvents, grinding fluids or cutting oil can come into contact with the unit. - Avoid high temperature, high humidity, and outside weather conditions, such as wind, rain or direct sunlight. - Avoid locations where excessive dust, salt, and metallic particles are present. - Avoid installing the unit in a location where vibration or physical shock may be transmitted. Equipment must be correctly mounted so that the main terminal of MONITOUCH will not be touched inadvertently. Otherwise, an accident or electric shock may occur. Tighten the fixtures of the MONITOUCH with a torque in the specified range. Excessive tightening may distort the panel surface. Loose tightening may cause MONITOUCH to come off, malfunction or be short-circuited. Check periodically that terminal screws on the power supply terminal block and fixtures are firmly tightened. Loosened screws may result in fire or malfunction. Tighten terminal screws on the power supply terminal block equally to a torque of 0. N m. Improper tightening of screws may result in fire, malfunction, or trouble. MONITOUCH has a glass screen. Do not drop or give physical shock to the unit. Otherwise, the screen may be damaged. Connect the cables correctly to the terminals of MONITOUCH in accordance with the specified voltage and wattage. Over-voltage, over-wattage or incorrect cable connection could cause fire, malfunction or damage to the unit. Be sure to establish a ground of MONITOUCH. Ground FG terminal which must be used for the unit. Otherwise, electric shock or a fire may occur. Prevent any conductive particles from entering into MONITOUCH. Failure to do so may lead to fire, damage or malfunction. After wiring is finished, remove the paper used as a dust cover before starting to operate MONITOUCH. Operation with the cover attached may result in accident, fire, malfunction, or trouble. Do not attempt to repair MONITOUCH at your site. Ask Hakko or the designated contractor for repair. Do not disassemble or modify MONITOUCH. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction. Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd. is not responsible for any damages resulting from repair, overhaul or modification of MONITOUCH that was performed by an unauthorized person. Do not use a sharp-pointed tool when pressing a touch switch. Doing so may damage the screen. Only experts are authorized to set up the unit, connect the cables or perform maintenance and inspection. For MONITOUCH using a lithium battery, handle the battery with care. The combustible materials such as lithium or organic solvent contained in the battery may generate heat, explode, or catch fire, resulting in personal injury or fire. Read related manuals carefully and handle the lithium battery correctly as instructed. When using a MONITOUCH that has analog switch resolution with resistance film, do not press two or more points on the screen at the same time. If there is a switch between the two pressed points, it may be activated. Take safety precautions during such operations as setting change during running, forced output, start, and stop. Any misoperation may cause unexpected machine motions, resulting in machine accident or damage. In facilities where a failure of MONITOUCH could lead to accident threatening human life or other serious damage, be sure that the facilities are equipped with adequate safeguards. At the time of disposal, MONITOUCH must be treated as industrial waste. Before touching MONITOUCH, discharge static electricity from your body by touching grounded metal. Excessive static electricity may cause malfunction or trouble.

8 [General Notes] Never bundle control cables and input/output cables with high-voltage and large-current carrying cables such as power supply cables. Keep these cables at least 00 mm away from the high-voltage and large-current carrying cables. Otherwise, malfunction may occur due to noise. When using MONITOUCH in an environment where a source of high-frequency noise is present, it is recommended that the FG shielded cable (communication cable) be grounded at its ends. However, the cable may be grounded only at one end if this is necessary due to unstable communication conditions or for any other reason. Plug connectors or sockets of MONITOUCH in the correct orientation. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction. Do not use thinners for cleaning because they may discolor the MONITOUCH surface. Use alcohol or benzine commercially available. If a data receive error occurs when MONITOUCH and the counterpart (PLC, temperature controller, etc.) are started at the same time, read the manual for the counterpart unit and handle the error correctly. Avoid discharging static electricity on the mounting panel of the MONITOUCH. Static charges can damage the unit and cause malfunctions. Otherwise, malfunction may occur due to noise. Avoid prolonged display of any fixed pattern. Due to the characteristics of the liquid crystal display, an afterimage may occur. If a prolonged display of a fixed pattern is expected, use the auto OFF function of the backlight.

9

10 Contents Preface Notes on Safe Use of MONITOUCH. Before Connecting to PLC Types of Connection... - Interface... - Wiring ( : Connection)... - V-SFT Setting ( : Connection) Allen-Bradley PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - PLC- Series: Switch Setting... - PLC- Channel SLC00 Series, Micro Logix 00: Transmission Parameter Setting Wiring Automationdirect PLC 4. Baldor PLC. DELTA PLC 6. FANUC PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring... - Available PLCs Communication Setting Available Memory Wiring Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring... - Available PLCs Communication Setting Available Memory Wiring FATEK AUTOMATION PLC. Fuji Electric PLC 9. GE Fanuc PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring... - Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - MICREX-F Series, SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC Series: Switch Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring... - Available PLCs Communication Setting Available Memory Wiring... 9-

11 0. Hitachi PLC. IDEC PLC. KEYENCE PLC Available PLCs Communication Setting Switch Setting Available Memory Wiring Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring... - Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory Wiring KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC 4. LG PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Switch Setting... - Wiring... - Available PLCs Communication Setting Available Memory Wiring Matsushita Electric Works PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - DIP Switch Setting... - System Register Setting... - Available Memory Wiring MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC Available PLCs Communication Setting A Series Link, QnA Series Link: Switch Setting Available Memory Wiring A Link + Net V-MDD (Dual Port Interface) MODICON PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring MOELLER PLC 9. OMRON PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring... - Available PLCs Communication Setting Available Memory Wiring SYSMAC CS/CJ DNA... 9-

12 0. SAIA PLC. SAMSUNG PLC. SHARP PLC Available PLCs Communication Setting S-BUS Configuration Available Memory Wiring Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring... - Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - JW Series: Switch Setting... - JW Series, JW00/0H COM Port, JW0 COM Port, JW00 Series: System Memory Setting... - Available Memory Wiring SHINKO ELECTRIC PLC 4. Siemens PLC. TAIAN PLC 6. Telemecanique PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring... - Available PLCs Communication Setting Available Memory Wiring Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring... - Available PLCs Communication Setting Available Memory Wiring TOSHIBA PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring Toyoda Machine Works PLC Available PLCs Communication Setting Switch Setting Available Memory Screen Editing (Memory Input) Wiring... 9-

13 0. VIGOR PLC. Yamatake PLC Available PLCs Communication Setting Available Memory Wiring Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring Yaskawa Electric PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring Yokogawa Electric PLC Available PLCs... - Communication Setting... - Available Memory... - Wiring Appendix PLCWay PLCWay... App- Limitations on Connection at PLCWay... App- PLCs Compatible with PLCWay Connection at MJ Port... App- Wiring... App-4 V-SFT Setting... App-6 Reading the PLC Memory... App- Writing into PLC Memory (V series only)... App- Sampling from the PLC Memory... App- Transferring Data in the PLC Memory... App- Indirect Memory Designation... App- User Log Read for Yokogawa s PLC... App- Processing Cycle... App- Notes on Screen Data Transfer... App-9 System Memory... App-0 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) Multi-link... App- Wiring... App- V-SFT Setting... App- Communication Error... App- Appendix Appendix 4 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link) Multi-link... App- Wiring... App- V-SFT Setting... App-6 : n Connection (Multi-drop) : n Connection... App4- Wiring (RS-4/4)... App4- V-SFT Setting... App4- Notes on Communication Errors... App4- Ethernet Ethernet... App- LAN Port Specifications... App- IP Address for the V Series... App- Wiring... App-6 Transferring Screen Data... App-9 V-SFT Setting: PLC Type/Communication Parameter... App- V-SFT Setting: Network Table Editing... App-6 V-SFT Setting: Macro... App- System Memory... App-4 Ethernet Access Functions (HKEtn0.DLL)... App- Server Communication Procedure... App-4 Error Display... App-4

14 Appendix 6 Appendix Appendix Universal Serial Communications Interface... App6- System Setting... App6- Standard Type Protocol... App6- -byte Character Code List... App6-9 Memory Map... App6-40 V-Link V-Link... App- Wiring... App- V-SFT Setting... App-4 Protocol... App- NAK: Error Codes... App-9 -byte Character Code List... App-0 Ladder Transfer Function Applicable PLCs... App- Connection... App- Setting... App- Notes on Ladder Transfer Function... App-4 Ladder Communication Program... App- Connection Compatibility List V/V0/V0/V06+DU-0... List- V06... List-

15

16 RUN STOP Before Connecting to PLC -. Before Connecting to PLC Types of Connection There are four types of connection between MONITOUCH(es) and PLC(s). : Connection Outline One set of the V series is connected to one PLC ( : connection). The wiring diagrams and the description of settings for connection to PLCs in : connections can be found from Chapter onward. V series PLC CN RS-C or RS-4 (RS-4) The host link unit of the PLC or the CPU port is used and the V series (master station) establishes communications according to the protocol of the PLC. Consequently, it is not necessary to have the dedicated communication program on the PLC (slave station). The V series reads the PLC memory for screen display. It is also possible to write switch data or numerical data entered through the keypad directly to the PLC memory. V series PLC Read Write Connection The interface used for : connection varies depending on the V series model. CN (D-sub -pin) for V series and V06 + DU-0 MJ (RJ-4 -pin) for V06 V series CN PLC V06 MJ CN V06 + DU-0 For details on wiring and settings for : connection, refer to page -.

17 -. Before Connecting to PLC : n Connection (Multi-drop) Outline One V series is connected to multiple PLCs. (Maximum connectable PLCs: ) V series CN Maximum length (V series to the terminating PLC) = 00 m RS-4/RS-4 connection PLC PLC PLC PLCn (n = to ) Notes on Connection For more information, refer to Appendix 4, : n Connection (Multi-drop).

18 . Before Connecting to PLC - n : Connection (Multi-link ) Outline One PLC is connected to a maximum of four V series. An original network is created where the V series (Local Port ) that is directly connected to the PLC is the master station, and other three V series are slave stations. Only the master station makes communications directly with the PLC, and the slave stations make communications with the PLC via the master station. V master station V slave station V slave station V slave station Local port Local port Local port Local port 4 CN MJ CN CN CN RS-C RS-4 RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable V6-MLT ( m) RS-4 connection PLC Communications between the V master station and the PLC depend on the communication speed set on the PLC. The maximum available speed for the V series is kbps, which is higher than the one available with multi-link connection described in n : Connection (Multi-link) (page -4). This multi-link connection is available with almost all the PLC models that support : connection (refer to the Appendix ). The connection between the master station and the PLC is the same as the one for : connection. Use the RS-4 -wire connection between stations of the V series. Please use Hakko Electronics multi-link master cable (V6-MLT) for connection between the master station (Local Port ) and the slave station (Local Port ). In the following cases, multi-link connection is not available.. A communication interface unit (example: OPCN-, CC-LINK, Ethernet, etc.) is used.. The V6 series (master or slave station) is used for the temperature control network or PLCWay function. The V and V6 series can be used together. The V6 series can be the master station. (However, when V606/V606i is the master station, the slave station must be V606/V606i. Also, depending on the hardware version of the V6 series, multi-link connection may not be supported. Refer to the V6 Hardware Specifications.) Notes on Connection For more information, refer to Appendix, n : Connection (Multi-link ).

19 -4. Before Connecting to PLC n : Connection (Multi-link) Outline One PLC is connected to multiple V series. (Maximum connectable V series: ) V series No. V series No. V series No. V series No. n (n = to ) CN CN CN CN Maximum length (PLC to the terminating V series) = 00 m RS-4/RS-4 connection PLC The PLC must be of the type of signal level RS-4/RS-4 with port numbers. For the available PLC models, refer to Connection Compatibility List at the back of this manual. RS-4 connection between the V series PLC must be in -wire connection. The V and V6 series can be used together. Notes on Connection For more information, refer to Appendix, n : Connection (Multi-link).

20 . Before Connecting to PLC - Interface CN (D-sub -pin) (V series and V06 + DU-0) 4 CN (D-sub -pin, female) Contents FG Frame ground SD RS-C send data RD RS-C receive data 4 RS RS-C RS request to send CS RS-C CS clear to send 6 Not used ground Not used 9 + V Use prohibited 0 0 V Use prohibited Not used +SD RS-4 send data (+) SD RS-4 send data ( ) 4 +RS RS-4 RS send data (+) Not used 6 Not used RS RS-4 RS send data ( ) CS RS-4 CS receive data ( ) 9 +CS RS-4 CS receive data (+) 0 Not used Use prohibited (V0: not used) Use prohibited (V0: not used) Not used 4 +RD RS-4 receive data (+) RD RS-4 receive data ( ) PLC D-sub -pin (male) The following connector is recommended. Recommended connector DDK-make JE0-0 (DA) D-sub -pin, male, metric thread, with hood

21 -6. Before Connecting to PLC MJ (V06 only) MJ Contents 46 * * +SD/RD +SD SD/RD SD RS-4 + data RS-4 + send data RS-4 data RS-4 send data * Switch between RS-C/RS-4 and RS-4 for pin Nos.,,, and with the slide switch on the MONITOUCH. For more information, refer to Slide Switch. * The maximum current for the output power supply (+ V) is 0 ma when MJ or MJ is used. 4 6 * * + V RD +RD SD -RD Externally supplied + V Max. 0 ma * ground RS-C receive data RS-4 + receive data RS-C send data RS-4 receive data Pin arrangement on the MONITOUCH 46 Pin arrangement on the cable 64 PLC RJ-4 -pin * The pin arrangement shown above assumes the cable is viewed as shown in the figure. Slide Switch Whether MJ is used as an RS-C/RS-4 or RS-4 (4-wire) port is selected with the slide switch. Before connecting a V06 to a PLC, check that the switch is set to the correct side. The slide switch is adjacent to the DIP switch on the side of the V06. The switch is factory-set to RS-4. When RS-4 is selected, the slide switch is in the lower position. To select RS-C/RS4, slide the switch to the upper position. Side View Slide switch Lower position: RS-4 (4-wire) Upper position: RS-C/RS-4

22 . Before Connecting to PLC - Connection between MJ and PLC There are two connection methods. With MJ-PLC One method uses an adaptor MJ-PLC for connection between MJ and the D-sub -pin connector plus a PLC communication cable. For connection of a PLC communication cable, refer to the CN pin arrangement. Example: Connecting to MITSUBISHI ASJUC4-R V series PLC communication cable MJ MJ-PLC D-sub -pin (male) FG SD RD Pin No. PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) CD RD Pin No. RS 4 SD CS DR 6 RS CS With V6-TMP Refer to the PLC wiring diagram and the MJ pin arrangement. Example: Connecting to MITSUBISHI ASJUC4-R MJ RJ-4 -pin Pin No. SHELL SD RD V6-TMP PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) Pin No. CD RD SD DR 6 RS CS

23 -. Before Connecting to PLC Wiring ( : Connection) DANGER Electric shock hazard Shut the power off before connecting cables. Prepare the communication cable with the PLC on your side. Refer to the following information for the cable. For more information on the connection to respective PLCs, refer to Chapter and later. RS-C Connection Connect the shielded cable either to the V series or PLC side. This connection diagram shows the case where the shielded cable is connected on the V series side. When connecting the shielded cable to the V series side, connect it to pin of the connector or the connector case cover. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as (signal ground). Connect the shielded cable to the metal shell of modular jack. Twisted pairs of 0. mm sq. or above are recommended. V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) Shield To the PLC s RS-C port * SHELL SD Receive data RD Send data RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. If noise disturbs communications, use twisted pairs between SD/ and RD/. * SD V06 MJ SHELL V Series CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) Shield To the PLC s RS-C port Receive data RD RS 4 Send data CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as.

24 . Before Connecting to PLC -9 RS-4/4 Connection Connect twisted pairs between +SD/ SD and +RD/ RD. If the PLC has the terminal for signal ground (), be sure to connect a wire. Connect the shielded cable either to the V series or PLC side. This connection diagram shows the case where the shielded cable is connected on the V series side. When connecting the shielded cable to the V series side, connect it to pin of the connector or the connector case cover. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as (signal ground). Connect the shielded cable to the metal shell of modular jack. To use a terminal block for connection, use Hakko Electronics TC4 optionally available. When using TC4 on the V06, the option unit DU-0 must be installed. The DIP switch on the side or back of V series units is used to set the terminating resistors. For more information, refer to the description of the DIP switch setting in the relevant Hardware Specifications. Twisted pairs of 0. mm sq. or above are recommended. <4-wire system> V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) Shield * SHELL +SD -SD To the PLC s RS-4 port Receive data (+) Receive data ( ) +RD 4 Send data (+) -RD Send data ( ) * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. <-wire system> V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) Shield * SHELL To the PLC s RS-4 port +SD Send/receive data (+) -SD Send/receive data ( ) +RD 4 -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as.

25 -0. Before Connecting to PLC V-SFT Setting ( : Connection) For serial communications, the following settings on the V-SFT editor are required. The settings in the [Select PLC Type] and [Comm. Parameter] dialogs are shown on the Main Menu screen of the V series. (For more information, refer to Chapter 6, MONITOUCH Operations in V Hardware Specifications.) PLC Selection Select the PLC that is connected. Setting Procedure [System Setting] [PLC Type] [Select PLC Type] dialog Communication Parameter Setting The communication parameter setting is essential for successful communications between the V series PLC. Check the communication parameter setting on the PLC before making the setting on MONITOUCH. Setting Procedure [System Setting] [Comm. Parameter] [Comm. Parameter] dialog Setting Items [Connection] ( : / : n / Multi-Link / Multi-Link ) Select the type of connection between the V series and the PLC. There are four types available. Depending on the selected type, the setting items in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog or those for the memory vary. Select [ : ] for : connection. [Local No.] Set the port number of the PLC. [Trans. Mode] (Trans. Mode / Trans. Mode 4) When the PLC has a transmission mode setting, set the same on the V series. This setting must be used for PLCs of MITSUBISHI, OMRON, HITACHI, YOKOGAWA, Toyoda Machinery and YASKAWA. [Baud Rate] [ Level] [Data Length] [Stop Bit] [Parity] Make the same setting as the PLC. (Refer to Chapter and later.) [Baud Rate] (400, 9600, 900, 400, 600, 600, kbps) Set the same communication speed as the PLC. [ Level] (RS-C/RS-4) Set the same communication interface as the PLC. [Data Length] (-bit/-bit) Choose either data length for communication. [Stop Bit] (-bit/-bit) Choose either stop bit for communication. [Parity] (None/Odd/Even) Choose any of the parity options for communication. [Send Delay Time] (0 to ) (Unit: msec) Set a time delay in sending the next command to the PLC PLC after receipt of a response from the PLC. MONITOUCH Normally use the default setting. Send delay time t

26 . Before Connecting to PLC - Choose the action to be taken against communication errors. [Comm. Err. Handling] Set error handling routine in the case that a communication error between the V series and the PLC occurs. [Stop] If any communication error has arisen, the communications are stopped. When restoring, use the Retry switch (found on the error screen of the V series). [Continuous] If any communication error has arisen, it is indicated at the top left corner on the V screen. The V series conducts polling of the PLC, and if OK, the error state is automatically reset. Supplemental Information: Polling Polling means to constantly monitor and check the state of the other station. [Time-out Time] (0 to 999) (Unit: 0 msec) Specify a time for monitoring the receiving of a response from the PLC. If no response is received within the specified time, a retrial is attempted. [Retrials] ( to ) Specify the number of retrial times. When the problem persists even after as many retrials as specified, the system will start the error handling routine. [Text Process] 0 (LSB MSB / MSB LSB) When processing characters, choose [LSB MSB] MSB nd byte LSB st byte either option for arranging st/nd bytes 0 in one word. [Code] (DEC/BCD) Choose the code for entering numerical data. [MSB LSB] MSB st byte LSB nd byte For some numerical data, such as those for data displays or data sampling in the sampling mode, this setting is not applied because BCD or DEC should be chosen for [Input Format]. [Read Area] [Write Area] For more information, refer to System Memory (page -). [ Read/Write Area GD-0 Compatible] When converting screen data files created on GD-0 into those of the V series, this option is automatically checked. When this option is checked, GD-0 compatibility is supported by securing words each for [Read Area] and [Write Area] in the same format as GD-0. For more information, refer to the GD-0 User s Manual. [ Use Ethernet] When using Ethernet communications, check this option. For details, refer to 9. Ethernet in Chapter, Connections in the separate V Hardware Specifications.

27 -. Before Connecting to PLC System Memory [Read Area] and [Write Area] must be secured for communications between the V series and the PLC. Setting Procedure [System Setting] [Comm. Parameter] [Comm. Parameter] dialog Setting Items [Read Area] ( words or more)* - This is the area where commands from the PLC are received for screen display changes. Consecutive three words from the specified memory address are used as read area. Address Contents n RCVDAT Sub command/data n + SCRN_COM Screen status command n + SCRN_No Screen number command * When you have created screens with the following function, the number of required memory addresses vary. When the sampling function is used: Refer to the Reference Manual (Function). [ Read/Write Area GD-0 Compatible] is checked: Refer to the GD-0 User s Manual. - Set 0 for all the bits not used in the read area. RCVDAT (n) Sub command/data Free BZ0 ([0 ] leading edge) To forcibly change the bits for free BZ ([0 ] leading edge) area, the same data is written to System reserved (setting [0]) CFMDATA in [Write Area] after the screen is displayed. Calendar setting ([0 ] leading edge) Use this function for watch dog or System reserved (setting [0]) display scanning. SCRN_COM (n + ) Screen status command Overlap 0 Overlap Overlap System reserved (setting [0]) Global macro execution ([0 ] leading edge) Data sheet output ([0 ] leading edge) Screen hard copy ([0 ] leading edge) Backlight (level) Analog RGB input (level) Screen internal switching (level) Screen forced switching ([0 ] leading edge) Data read refresh ([0 ] leading edge) Normal overlap or call-overlap: 0 : ON 0: OFF Multi-overlap: Level (with exceptions)

28 . Before Connecting to PLC - SCRN_No. (n + ) Screen number command Screen number System reserved (setting [0]) Use example: To specify a screen number from the PLC: When D0 is set for [Read Area], the screen number is written in D of the PLC. Problem example: The screen display does not change when a screen number is specified from the PLC. If the same number as the one specified for n + is already contained in this memory address, the screen display does not change even if it is specified again. For example, if screen No. is specified from the PLC and it was once changed to screen No. No. 0 by internal switches, normally it cannot be returned to the former screen No. that was specified by an external command, because the external screen command number () remains the same as before in the memory address ( D in the read area) for the screen number command. In such a case, it is possible to forcibly switch the screen to the screen number contained in D in the read area at the leading edge [0 ] of bit 4 of the memory address for the screen status command ( D in the read area). Screen No. D000 D00 D00 No. Read area n + = Screen number command No. Data in the read area n + remains the same even if the actual screen has been switched internally. Screen No. No. 0 To show screen No. again using an external screen command, set [0 ] to bit 4 of read area n +. D000 D00 D00 Screen forced switching (bit 4) Screen No. 0 No. 0 Screen No. No. No.

29 -4. Before Connecting to PLC [Write Area] ( words)* This is an area where the screen status is written. Consecutive three words from the specified memory address are used as write area. * When you have converted GD-0 data to the V series data, the number of required memory addresses vary. Refer to the GD-0 User s Manual. CFMDAT (n) Address Contents n CFMDAT Same as data in read area n n + SCRN_COM Screen status n + SCRN_No Displayed screen number BZ0 BZ System reserved (setting [0]) Calendar setting System reserved (setting [0]) Free SCRN_COM (n + ) Screen status Overlap 0 Overlap Overlap System reserved (setting [0]) Serial extension I/O Global macro execution Printer busy Print data transferring Backlight Analog RGB input Screen internal switching Screen forced switching Data read refresh SCRN_No. (n + ) Displayed screen number Screen number System reserved (setting [0])

30 . Allen-Bradley PLC -. Allen-Bradley PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection PLC- PLC- -KE RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] 0-KF RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] SLC00 PLC-/40 Channel 0 SLC /0 and later CPU (processor module) RS-C channel 4-KE Micro Logix 000 Micro Logix 000 Port on CPU RS-C [Wiring Diagram 6] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 9] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] A B s RS-C Ladder transfer cable * + RS- [Wiring Diagram ] Control Logix Control Logix 6 system Logix0 * * When using RS-C ladder transfer cable made by Allen-Bradley, connect the cable shown in [Wiring Diagram ] to the D-sub 9-pin side of the ladder transfer cable for communications with the V series. * For more information on connection to A B Control Logix, refer to Connection with A B Control Logix separately provided. Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: PLC- Series Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even Transmission mode RS-C RS-4 -KE not supported Transmission Data length code Stop bit Protocol Full duplex (fixed) Error check BCC (fixed) Reponse NO (fixed)

31 -. Allen-Bradley PLC SLC00 Series Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even Transmission mode RS-C RS-4 Channel 0 not supported Transmission Data length code Stop bit Protocol Full duplex (fixed) Error check BCC (fixed) Reponse NO (fixed) Micro Logix 000 Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 0 0 Parity None (fixed) Not provided Transmission Data length (fixed) code Stop bit (fixed) Error check CRC (fixed) Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. PLC- Series Memory TYPE Remarks N (integer) 0 B (bit) T.ACC (timer/current value) T.PRE (timer/set value) C.ACC (counter/current value) 4 C.PRE (counter/set value) I (input) 6 O (output) S (status) T (timer/control) 9 C (counter/control) 0 R (control) R.LEN (control/data length) R.POS (control/data position) D (BCD) 4 A (ASCII)

32 . Allen-Bradley PLC - SLC00 Series, Micro Logix 000 Memory TYPE Remarks N (integer) 0 B (bit) T.ACC (timer/current value) T.PRE (timer/set value) C.ACC (counter/current value) 4 C.PRE (counter/set value) I (input) 6 O (output) S (status) T (timer/control) 9 C (counter/control) 0 R (control) R.LEN (control/data length) R.POS (control/data position) D (BCD) 4 A (ASCII) F (FLOAT) 6 ST (STRING) L (LONG) Micro Logix 000 only PLC- Series: Switch Setting -KE SW (Protocol) No Setting Contents ON OFF BCC, even, no OFF 4 ON Duplicated message unacceptable OFF Handshaking signal ignored 6 ON Execution of diagnosis command SW (Station number) Set the station number of -KE. (This station should not be duplicated in the network.) No Setting Contents ON st digit (octal) ON ON/OFF 4 ON/OFF nd digit (octal) ON/OFF 6 ON/OFF ON/OFF rd digit (octal) ON/OFF

33 -4. Allen-Bradley PLC SW (Network link communication speed) Adjust to the settings of the network you are using. No Setting Contents ON Data highway (.6 kbps) ON ON 4 ON Link communication speed (9. kbps) ON 6 ON Local/remote selection SW4 (Reserved) No Setting Contents OFF OFF For extension, always OFF OFF 4 OFF 0-KF SW (Protocol) No Setting Contents ON Protocol OFF Protocol ON Duplicated message unacceptable 4 OFF Handshaking signal ignored OFF Protocol SW, SW, SW4 (Station number) Set the station number of 0-KF. (This station should not be duplicated in the network.) SW (Network link communication speed) Adjust to the settings of the network you are using. Switch Setting Contents ON ON.6 kbps SW6 (Asynchronous link communication speed) Adjust to the settings of the V series. No Setting Contents OFF ON 9600 bps ON 4 ON Execution of diagnosis command

34 . Allen-Bradley PLC - SW (Network link selection) Switch Setting Contents ON OFF Peer transmission link SW (RS-C/RS-4 selection) Switch Setting Contents OFF ON RS-C ON OFF RS-4 PLC- Channel 0 Switch (RS-C/RS-4 setting) Switch RS-C RS-4 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF 6 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 9 ON ON 0 OFF OFF Channel Properties Channel 0 Communication Mode : System (Point-To-Point) Remote Mode Change : Unchecked (Disabled) Serial Port Baud Rate : 900 Bits Per Char : Stop Bits : Parity : Even Error Detect : BCC Control Line : Full-Duplex Options NAK Receive : DF ENQs : ACK Timeout (0ms) : 0 Detect Duplicate Messages : Checked

35 -6. Allen-Bradley PLC SLC00 Series, Micro Logix 00: Transmission Parameter Setting CPU Port Channel 0 Set up the parameters for CPU port channel 0 using the software specifically designed for this purpose. Driver : DF Full Duplex Baud : 900 Parity : EVEN Control Line : No Handshaking Error Detection : BCC Embedded Responses : Auto-Detect Duplicate Packed Detect : ON ACK Timeout ( 0 ms) : 0 NAK Retries : ENQ Retries : 4-KE Set up the parameters for 4-KE using the software specifically designed for this purpose. DF Port Setup Menu Baudrate : 900 Bits Per Character : Parity : Even Stop Bits : DF Full-Duplex Setup Parameters Duplicate Packet Detection : Enabled Checksum : BCC Constant Carrier Detect : Disabled Message Timeout : 400 Hardware Handshaking : Disabled Embedded Response Detect : Auto Detect ACK Timeout ( ms) : 90 ENQuiry Retries : NAK Received Retries :

36 . Allen-Bradley PLC - Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * SD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) TXD RD RXD RS 4 RTS 4 CS CTS DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. DCD DTR Wiring Diagram * SD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (female) TXD RD RXD RS 4 RTS 4 CS CTS DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. DCD DTR 0

37 -. Allen-Bradley PLC Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) * SHELL DCD SD RXD RD TXD RS 4 DTR 4 CS COM DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RTS CTS Wiring Diagram 4 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) SD RXD RD TXD RS 4 DTR 4 CS COM DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RTS CTS

38 . Allen-Bradley PLC -9 Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) * SHELL CD SD RD RD RS CS 4 SD RS 4 GND A B s RS-C Ladder transfer cable Micro Logix 000 DR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS CS Wiring Diagram 6 V06 MJ V Series CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD TXD RD RXD RS 4 RTS 4 CS CTS DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. DCD DTR 0 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

39 -0. Allen-Bradley PLC RS-4 Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (female) +SD RTS 4 -SD CTS +RD 4 DSR 6 -RD DCD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. TDA 4 RDA 6 RDB DTR TDB 0 * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) TXD +SD RXD -SD COM +RD 4 RXD+ 6 -RD TXD+ 9 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

40 . Allen-Bradley PLC - Wiring Diagram 9 +SD -SD +RD -RD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) 4 PLC D-sub -pin (male) TXD OUT+ RXD IN+ TXD OUT- 4 RXD IN- 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

41 -. Allen-Bradley PLC Please use this page freely.

42 . Automationdirect PLC -. Automationdirect PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection D4-40 D4-440 Port on a CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Direct LOGIC D4-40 Port on a CPU unit RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] Port on a CPU unit D-40 Port on a CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] D-0 Port on a CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] D4-40 D4-440 Port on a CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Direct LOGIC (K-Sequence) D4-40 D-40 D-0 Port 0 on a CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram 4] Port on a CPU unit RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] Port on a CPU unit Port on a CPU unit Port on a CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Port on a CPU unit Port on a CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 for 0, for Parity Odd Odd Transmission Data length code Stop bit Function Host link system (fixed) Response delay time 0 (fixed) Time-out None (fixed) ASCII/HEX HEX (fixed)

43 -. Automationdirect PLC Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks V (data register) 0 X (input relay) Y (output relay) C (internal relay) S (stage) 4 GX (global inputs) GY (global outputs) 6 T (timer/contact) CT (counter/contact) Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

44 . Automationdirect PLC - Wiring Diagram * SD RD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC Modular connector 6-pin RxD RS 4 TxD 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. 64 Wiring Diagram * SD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) TXD PLC High density D-sub -pin (male) RD RXD RS 4 RTS 4 CS CTS 0V * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

45 -4. Automationdirect PLC Wiring Diagram 4 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD TXD RD RXD RS 4 0V CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) +SD RXD+ 9 -SD RXD 0 +RD 4 CTS+ -RD TXD+ 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. TXD RTS+ RTS CTS+ 6 9

46 . Automationdirect PLC - Wiring Diagram 6 * V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) SHELL PLC D-sub -pin (male) +SD TXD+ -SD TXD +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RXD+ 4 RXD In case SU-6M, it is possible to use terminal blocks.

47 -6. Automationdirect PLC Please use this page freely.

48 4. Baldor PLC 4-4. Baldor PLC Available PLCs Mint Select PLC Type Unit/Port Connection NextMove (Comms Data Array) Optimum (Comms Data Array) RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 0 0 Parity None None Transmission code Data length Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks I (Integer) 0 F (Float) B (Integer omitting decimals)

49 4-4. Baldor PLC Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * SD RD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) RXD TXD DTR DSR RTS CTS 4 6

50 . DELTA PLC -. DELTA PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection DVP series DVP series RS-4 Communication port RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port Parity Even Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 X (input relay) Y (output relay) M (auxiliary relay) S 4 T (timer) C (counter) 6 C (high-speed counter)

51 -. DELTA PLC Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC +SD + -SD - +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

52 6. FANUC PLC 6-6. FANUC PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection Power Mate-Model H/D Port on the CPU unit (JD4) RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Power Mate Power Mate i Model H/D JD4 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] JD40 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps (fixed) Port 0 (fixed) Parity Even (fixed) Transmission code Data length (fixed) Stop bit (fixed) Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks D (data table) 0 X (input relay) WX as word device Y (output relay) WY as word device R (internal relay) WR as word device K (keep relay) 4 WK as word device T (timer) C (counter) 6

53 6-6. FANUC PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * SD RD RS V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) 4 PLC JD4 Half-pitch 0-pin RDB SDB 9 0V CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS-4 Wiring Diagram * V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) SHELL PLC JD4 Half-pitch 0-pin RDB +SD RDA -SD SDB +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. R SDA 0V RDB JD 4 RDA R: 0 Ω /W

54 6. FANUC PLC 6- Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL +SD PLC JD40 Half-pitch 0-pin RXD *RXD -SD +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. TXD *TXD RTS *RTS CTS *CTS 0V 4 6 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

55 FANUC PLC Please use this page freely.

56 . FATEK AUTOMATION PLC -. FATEK AUTOMATION PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection Programming interface RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] FACON FB series FACON FB series FB-DTBR port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] FB-DTBR port RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Parity Even (fixed) Transmission code Data length (fixed) Stop bit (fixed) Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks HR (data register) 0 DR (data register) X (input relay) Y (output relay) M (internal relay) 4 S (step relay) T (timer contact) 6 Read only C (counter contact) Read only RT (timer/current value) RC (counter/current value) 9 DRC (-bit counter/current value) 0

57 -. FATEK AUTOMATION PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD RXD RD TXD RS 4 RTS CS CTS 4 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD RXD RD TXD RS 4 RTS CS CTS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

58 . FATEK AUTOMATION PLC - RS-4 Wiring Diagram * +SD V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) SHELL PLC D+ -SD D +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

59 -4. FATEK AUTOMATION PLC Please use this page freely.

60 . Fuji Electric PLC -. Fuji Electric PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection PLCWay F NVL-RS RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Ladder Transfer *4 MICREX-F series (MICREX-F series V4) F0, F0S F0H, F0H, F0S F40S, FxS NCL-RS RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] NCL-RS4 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] FFU0B RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] FFK0A RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] NS-CPU-xx NJ-RS RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] SPB (N mode) and FLEX-PC series * NJ-CPU-xx NBxx NJ-RS RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] NJ-RS4 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] NB-RS RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] SPB (N mode) and FLEX-PC CPU * FLEX-PC COM(T) NW0Pxx FLEX-PC NW0LA-RS RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] NW0LA-RS4 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] CPU port RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable FU-CPUNS * NJ-B6 RS-C port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] NW0Pxx FLEX-PC NJ-JM CPU port Computer link terminal block RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable FU-CPUNS * RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] * To use FLEX-PC of Toyota version, select [FLEX-PC (T)]. * To use FLEX-PC CPU of Toyota version, select [FLEX-PC CPU (T)]. * For connection to MJ of a V06, use an MJ-PLC adaptor plus FU-CPUNS. *4 For the ladder transfer function, refer to Appendix Ladder Transfer Function.

61 -. Fuji Electric PLC Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: MICREX-F Series, SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC Series Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even Transmission mode Transmission code RS-C RS-4 Terminating resistance at receiver (asynchronous non-protocol by command) (fixed) * (asynchronous non-protocol by command) (fixed) * Data length (ASCII) Stop bit Provided for RS-4 * In the case of the SPB (N mode), select [General Command Asyn] for the communication interface setting (PLC Functions System Parameters General Communication) on the PLC loader. SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC CPU Port Connect to the CPU port. Communication parameters for the V series are automatically set. FLEX-PC COM (T) (NJ Computer Link) Toyota Version Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit MICREX-F Series, SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC Series: Switch Setting MODE switch: RS-C: RS-4: RS-4 Port Setting SW: 0 for both 0, RS-4 terminating resistance: ON Character switches No Setting Contents ON Switch Setting ON With parity 6 ON Even ON bits 4 ON bit ON ON Same as that set on V (normally 900 bps) OFF * In the case of the SPB (N mode), set it on the PLC loader.

62 . Fuji Electric PLC - Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. MICREX-F Series Memory TYPE Remarks M (auxiliary relay) 0 WM as word device K (keep relay) WK as word device B (input/output relay) WB as word device L (link relay) 9 WL as word device F (special relay) 0 WF as word device TS (timer/set value) * TR (timer/current value) * W9 (timer/current value 0.) * CS (counter/set value) 4 * CR (counter/current value) * BD (data memory) 6 * WS (step control relay) * Wn (file memory) *, *4 * For numerical data format where double-words can be used (Num. Data Display, Graph, Sampling), data is processed as double-words. For those where bits or words can be used, data is processed as words consisting of lower 6 bits. For input: Upper 6 bits are ignored. For output: 0 is written for upper 6 bits. * Byte device such as step relay is processed as described below. For input: Upper bits are 0. For output: Lower bits are written. * To set up the file memory on the V-SFT editor, enter file number + : (colon) + address in order. *4 Define the file area as SI. Example: W0 : 0000 Address Colon File number * Notes on V4 (or GD-0) data conversion When converting data of V4 (or GD-0) into the V data, [MICREX-F series V4] is automatically selected for the PLC type.

63 -4. Fuji Electric PLC SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC Series, SPB (N Mode) & FLEX-PC CPU Port Standard Memory Toyota Version TYPE Remarks D (data register) D 0 W (link register) R M (internal relay) M WM as word device L (latch relay) K WL (WK) as word device X (input relay) X 4 WX as word device Y (output relay) Y WY as word device R (file register) W 6 TN (timer/current value) TN CN (counter/current value) CN T (timer/contact) T 9 C (counter/contact) C 0 WS (step relay) Not provided FLEX-PC COM (T) (NJ Computer Link) Toyota Version Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 R (link register) M (internal relay) WM as word device K (latch relay) WK as word device X (input relay) 4 WX as word device Y (output relay) WY as word device W (file register) 6 TN (timer/current value) CN (counter/current value) T (timer/contact) 9 C (counter/contact) 0 Z (special register) V (special relay) WV as word device

64 . Fuji Electric PLC - Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS DR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CD Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) NJ-B6 D-sub -pin (male) SD RD RD SD RS 4 CTS 4 CS RTS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

65 -6. Fuji Electric PLC Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) * SHELL SD RD RD SD RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS CS RS-4 Wiring Diagram 4 V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) PLC * SHELL SDA +SD SDB -SD RDA +RD 4 RDB -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

66 . Fuji Electric PLC - RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC + +SD -SD +RD 4 -RD * Use shielded twist-pair cables. * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as.

67 -. Fuji Electric PLC Please use this page freely.

68 9. GE Fanuc PLC 9-9. GE Fanuc PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection 90 series Series 90-0 Programmable coprocessor (PCM) 90 series (SNP-X) Series 90 micro Series 90-0 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] CPU port RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: 90 Series Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 ( 0 for 0, ) 0 Parity Odd Odd Transmission Data length code Stop bit Functions Host link function (fixed) Response delay time 0 (fixed) Timeout None (fixed) ASCII/HEX HEX (fixed) 90 Series SNP-X Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Parity Odd Odd Transmission Data length code Stop bit Functions SNP-X (fixed)

69 9-9. GE Fanuc PLC Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. 90 Series Memory TYPE Remarks R (data register) 0 I (input) Q (output) 90 Series SNP-X Memory TYPE Remarks R (data register) 0 I (input) Q (output) M (internal relay) G (global relay) 4 AI (analog input) AQ (analog output) 6 T (temporary memory relay) S (system status) Read only SA (system status) 9 SB (system status) 0 SC (system status)

70 9. GE Fanuc PLC 9- Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * SD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) SD PLC D-sub -pin (male) RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS GND * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) 0V +SD SD(A) 9 -SD RTS(A) 0 +RD 4 CTS(A) -RD RD(A) * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. SD(B) RTS(B) CTS(B) * Use shielded twist-pair cables. 0 RT RD(B) 4

71 GE Fanuc PLC Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) RTS(A) 6 +SD 0V -SD CTS(B ) +RD 4 RT 9 -RD RD(A ) 0 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. RD(B ) SD(A) SD(B) RTS(B) CTS(A ) 4 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

72 0. Hitachi PLC 0-0. Hitachi PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection PLCWay COMM-H RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] HIDIC-H HIDIC H series EH0 Peripheral port on the CPU module RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] On H-C CPU module On CPU module PERIPHERAL RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] PERIPHERAL PORT PORT RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] + Hitachi s cable CNCOM-0 * RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] + Hitachi s cable EH-RS0 * S0 α Interface on the CPU unit RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] * HIDIC-S0/α RS-C connector on the CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] S0 mini LQE060 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] HIDIC-S0/4α S0 4α LWE0 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] * HIDIC-S0/ABS ABS * - RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] HIDIC-S0V S0V CPU LQP0 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] * When using the Hitachi s cable EH-RS0 or CNCOM-0, connect the cable shown in [Wiring Diagram ] to the D-sub -pin side for communications with the V series. * Specify the absolute memory address. For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the PLC. * For more detail, contact your local distributor. Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: HIDIC-H COMM-H Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 for both ST No 0, 0 Parity Even Even Transmission mode RS-C MODE Protocol with port RS-4 MODE9 Protocol with port Transmission Data length (ASCII) code Stop bit Sumcheck Provided (fixed)

73 0-0. Hitachi PLC If the transmission mode is any type other than listed the above, set the mode as shown below. Transmission mode Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting RS-C * Multi-link connection is not available. MODE MODE MODE9 CPU Module Peripheral Port, EH-0 Port / Protocol without port Protocol with port Protocol without port RS-4 MODE Protocol with port * Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps level RS-C RS-C Port 0 0 Parity Even (fixed) Even (fixed) Transmission Data length (ASCII) (fixed) (fixed) code Stop bit (fixed) (fixed) Sumcheck Provided (fixed) Port operation Dedicated port Communication control protocol Transmission control protocol Protocol without port HIDIC-S0/α, HIDIC-S0/4α Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps HIDIC-S0V Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps (fixed) 900 bps (fixed) Parity Odd (fixed) Odd (fixed) Transmission mode RS-4 (fixed) RS-4 (fixed) Transmission code Data length (fixed) (fixed) Stop bit (fixed) (fixed)

74 0. Hitachi PLC 0- Switch Setting COMM-H Baud rate: 900 bps MODE switch: To connect to both RS-C and RS-4, set MODE switch to 9. RS-C (protocol w/o port) RS-4 (protocol with port) ST No switch: 0 for both 0, DIP switch Switch Setting Contents OFF Bit length OFF ON Same as that set on V (normally 900 bps) 4 ON ON With parity 6 ON Even OFF Stop bit ON With sumcheck EH-0 PORT DIP SW Setting Contents ON 900 bps 4 OFF ON Dedicated port Special Internal Output Setting Contents WRF0 H0000 Transmission control protocol, without port, RS-C EH-0 PORT DIP SW Setting Contents 6 OFF 900 Special Internal Output Setting Contents WRF0 H0000 Transmission control protocol, without port, RS-C * Turn on (PHL High) the port switch.

75 Hitachi PLC Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. HIDIC-H Memory TYPE Remarks WR (internal word output) 0 X (external bit input) WX as word device Y (external bit output) WY as word device L (bit CPU link area) WL as word device M (bit data area) 4 WM as word device TC (timer counter/elapsed time) R (relay) 6 TD (timer counter/contact) WN (network input/output) HIDIC-S0/α, HIDIC-S0/4α Memory TYPE Remarks FW (work register) 0 X (input relay) XW as word device Y (output relay) YW as word device R (internal relay) RW as word device G (global link) 4 GW as word device K (keep relay) KW as word device T (on-delay timer contact) 6 TW as word device U (one-shot timer contact) UW as word device C (up/down counter contact) CW as word device TS (on-delay timer set value) 9 TC (on-delay timer elapsed value) 0 US (one-short timer set value) UC (one-shot timer elapsed value) CS (up/down counter set value) CC (up/down counter elapsed value) 4 DW (data register) E (event register) 6 EW as word device S (system register) SW as word device J (transfer register) JW as word device Q (receive register) 9 QW as word device M (extensional internal register) 0 MW as word device

76 0. Hitachi PLC 0- HIDIC-S0/ABS Memory TYPE Remarks 0E A 4 B C 6 D HIDIC-S0V Memory TYPE Remarks FW (work register) 0 X (input relay) XW as word device Y (output relay) YW as word device R (internal relay) RW as word device G (global link relay) 4 GW as word device K (keep relay) KW as word device T (on-delay timer contact) 6 TW as word device U (one-shot timer contact) UW as word device C (up/down counter contact) CW as word device TS (on-delay timer set value) 9 TC (on-delay timer elapsed value) 0 US (one-shot timer set value) UC (one-shot timer elapsed value) CS (up/down counter set value) CC (up/down counter elapsed value) 4 DW (data register) E (event register) 6 EW as word device S (system register) SW as word device J (transfer register) JW as word device Q (receive register) 9 QW as word device M (extensional internal register) 0 MW as word device LB (work register) LBW as word device LR (work register for ladder converter) LRW as word device LV (work register for ladder converter) LVW as word device LLL (long-word work register) 4 Double-word LFF (floating-point work register) LWW (word work register) 6 LML (long-work word register) Backup area Double-word LGF (floating-point work register) Backup area LXW (word work register) Backup area 9

77 Hitachi PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) FG PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD CS RS 4 CS DR PHL 9 * Use shielded twist-pair cables. PV 4 Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) SD RD RD SD RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

78 0. Hitachi PLC 0- Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) * SHELL CD SD RD RD SD RS 4 ER 4 CS DR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS CS RS-4 Wiring Diagram 4 V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC +SD TxDP -SD TxDN +RD 4 RxDP -RD RxDN * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

79 0-0. Hitachi PLC Wiring Diagram When connecting to the S0xα series, add a resistor of 0 Ω (/ W) as shown below. V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) PLC * SHELL +SD UTX H -SD UTX L +RD 4 0 URX H -RD 0 URX L * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 6 * V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) SHELL PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) +SD -RD -SD +RD +RD 4 +SD -RD -SD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

80 . IDEC PLC -. IDEC PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection MICRO MICRO Loader port MICRO Smart MICRO Smart Loader port * When using RS-C cable FCA-KC made by IDEC, connect the cable shown in [Wiring Diagram ] to the D-sub 9-pin side of the FCA-KC cable for communications with the V series. Communication Setting RS-C IDEC cable FCA-KC or IDEC cable FCA-KC * + [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C IDEC cable FCA-KC4C + [Wiring Diagram ] The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port Parity Even Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 I (input) Q (output) M (internal relay) R (shift register) 4 TS (timer/set value) TN (timer/enumerated value) 6 T (timer/contact) Read only CS (counter/set value) CN (counter/enumerated value) 9 C (counter/contact) 0 Read only

81 -. IDEC PLC Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) * SHELL CD SD SD RD RD RS 4 ER 4 CS GND DR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS CS

82 . KEYENCE PLC -. KEYENCE PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection KZ series link KZ00 KZ0 KZ-L Port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] KZ-A00CPU MITSUBISHI A series link KZ/KV series CPU KZ-A00 KZ-0, 6, 4, 40, 0, 00, 0 * KZ/KV series * CPU modular port KZ-L0 CPU modular port KZ4/00CPU KZ-4, 00 * CPU modular port KV0/4CPU KV-0, 4 * CPU modular port KV-00 KV-00 CPU modular port KV-L0 KV-L0R RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 KEYENCE s cable KZ-C0 + Hakko Electronics cable MB-CPUQ * Port RS-C [Wiring Diagram 4] Port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] or KEYENCE s cable OP-64 + KEYENCE s connector OP-64 Port RS-C [Wiring Diagram 6] Port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] KV-000 KV-000 CPU modular port KV-L0R RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] or KEYENCE s cable OP-64 + KEYENCE s connector OP-64 Port RS-C [Wiring Diagram 6] Port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] * For connection to MJ of a V06, use an MJ-PLC adaptor plus KZ-C0 and MB-CPUQ. * To connect KZ-4, 00 via RS-C, select [KZ4/00CPU] for the PLC type on the V-SFT editor. * To connect KZ-0, 4 via RS-C, select [KV0, 4CPU] for the PLC type on the V-SFT editor.

83 -. KEYENCE PLC Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: KZ Series Link Item Setting on PLC * V Comm. Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Parity Even Even Transmission Data length (ASCII) code Stop bit Terminating resistance ON for RS-4 Operation mode Link mode * Set the port with the port setting switch, the terminating resistance with terminator, and the baud rate/data bit/parity/stop bit with SET B DIP switches. KZ-A00 CPU (CPU Modular Port) Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps * Parity Odd Odd Transmission Data length code Stop bit Terminating resistance ON for RS-4 * For signal level RS-4, baud rate is fixed to 9600 bps. MITSUBISHI A Series Link (Link Unit KZ-L0) Item Setting on PLC * V Comm. Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Parity Even Even Transmission Data length code Stop bit Sumcheck Provided (fixed) Terminating resistance ON for RS-4 Communication type Normal communication Transmission mode Protocol code Trans. Mode * Set the port with the port setting switch, the terminating resistance with terminator, and the baud rate/ data bit/parity/stop bit with SET B DIP switches. For more information, refer to the instruction manual for KZ-L0. KZ/KV Series CPU Communication parameters for the V series are automatically set.

84 . KEYENCE PLC - KZ4/00 CPU Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 400 bps 400 bps * Parity Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit * Maximum baud rate available is 400 bps. If a higher baud rate is selected, communications are performed at 9600 bps. KV0/4 CPU Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate 600 bps 600 bps * Parity Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit * Maximum baud rate available is 600 bps. If a higher baud rate is selected, communications are performed at 9600 bps. KV-00/KV-000 Item Setting on PLC * V Comm. Parameter Setting Port 0 0 Baud rate * 9600 bps 9600 bps Parity Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit * Maximum baud rate available is 600 bps for KV-00 and kbps for KV-000. Select the appropriate baud rate depending on the used PLC and environment. * When using KV-L0R, select [Unit Setting] [Operation Mode] [KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO Mode] on the ladder tool software.

85 -4. KEYENCE PLC Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. KZ Series Link Memory TYPE Remarks DM (data memory) 0 CH (input/output relay) KZ-A00 CPU, MITSUBISHI A Series Link Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 W (link register) R (file register) TN (timer/current value) CN (counter/current value) 4 M (internal relay) 6 L (latch relay) B (link relay) X (input relay) 9 Y (output relay) 0 TS (timer/contact) TC (timer/coil) CS (counter/contact) CC (counter/coil) 4 KZ/KV Series CPU, KZ4/00 CPU, KV0/4 CPU Memory TYPE Remarks DM (data memory) 0 CH (input/output relay) TC (timer/current value) CC (counter/current value) TS (timer/set value) 4 CS (counter/set value) T (timer/contact) 6 C (counter/contact) TM (temporary data memory)

86 . KEYENCE PLC - KV-00, KV-000 Memory TYPE Remarks DM (data memory) 0 R (input/output/internal auxiliary/special relay) TC (timer/current value) CC (counter/current value) TS (timer/set value) 4 CS (counter/set value) T (timer/contact) 6 C (counter/contact) TM (temporary data memory) CTH (high-speed counter/current value) 9 CTC (high-speed counter comparator/set value) 0 CT (high-speed counter comparator/contact) CR (control relay) CM (control memory) MR (internal auxiliary relay) 4 KV-000 only LR (latch relay) KV-000 only EM (extended data memory ) 6 KV-000 only FM (extended data memory ) KV-000 only Z (index register) KV-000 only

87 -6. KEYENCE PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC * SHELL SD SD RD RD RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

88 . KEYENCE PLC - Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC Modular Connector 6-pin * SHELL CS SD SD RD 4 RS 4 RD CS RS 6 46 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 4 * SD RD RS CS V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) 4 PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD RD RS CS DR 4 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CD

89 -. KEYENCE PLC Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC Modular jack, 6-pin SD RD RD 4 RS 4 SD CS 46 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 6 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) SD RD RD SD RS 4 CS RS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

90 . KEYENCE PLC -9 RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) PLC * SHELL SDB +SD SDA -SD RDB +RD 4 RDA -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

91 -0. KEYENCE PLC Please use this page freely.

92 . KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC -. KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection SU-/E/6B/M/6M SU-E/6E U0-DM Universal port on CPU RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] SU/ SR-T SU-M/6M Universal port on CPU RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Universal port on CPU RS-C * SZ-4 SZ-4M - PZ SR-6T (Toyota version) PORT on CPU (universal communication port) PORT on CPU (universal communication port) G0-DM Port on CPU Universal communication port on the CPU unit U0-DM * When connecting to MJ on the V06, use an MJ-PLC adaptor plus the designated cables. KOYO s programmer connecting cable S-0JG-E + KOYO s conversion connector cable S-CNJ RS-C * KOYO s programmer connecting cable S-0JG-E + KOYO s conversion connector cable S-CNJ + KOYO s conversion connector S-HCNP RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] G0-DM RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] SR-T (K Protocol) SR-T (Toyota version) Terminal block on the CPU unit RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] SU/ (K-Sequence) SU-E/6B SU-M/6M SZ-4 SZ-4M Universal port on CPU RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C * Programmer port on CPU KOYO s programmer connecting cable S-0JG-E Universal port on CPU RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Universal port on CPU RS-C * PORT on CPU (programmer port) KOYO s programmer connecting cable S-0JG-E + PORT on CPU (universal communication port) PORT on CPU (programmer port) PORT on CPU (universal communication port) KOYO s conversion connector cable S-CNJ * RS-C KOYO s programmer connecting cable S-0JG-E + KOYO s conversion connector cable S-CNJ + KOYO s conversion connector S-HCNP

93 -. KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port [0] 0, [] Parity Odd Odd Transmission Data length code Stop bit Functions Host link function (fixed) Response delay time 0 (fixed) Timeout None (fixed) ASCII/HEX HEX (fixed) Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. SU/, SU/ (K-Sequence) Memory TYPE Remarks R (data register) 0 I (input relay) Q (output relay) M (internal relay) S (stage) 4 GI (global input) GQ (global output) 6 T (timer/contact) C (counter/contact) SR-T/SR-T (K Protocol) Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 X (input relay) Common to X/Y Y (output relay) Common to X/Y M (internal relay) S (stage) 4 K (keep relay) L (link relay) 6 T (timer/contact) C (counter/contact)

94 . KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC - Switch Setting U-0DM On-line/Off-line switch: On-line UNIT ADR switch: 0 for 0, for SW4 DIP switch: No Setting Contents ON ON Same as that set on V Normally 900 bps ON 4 ON With parity OFF Self-diagnosis 6 OFF OFF Response delay time 0 msec OFF SW DIP switch: No Setting Contents OFF Master/slave control OFF Slave OFF Communication timeout 4 OFF HEX mode

95 -4. KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC G-0DM On-line/Off-line switch: On-line Short plug : open Short plug : RS-C..... ENABLE RS DISENABLE SW DIP switch: No Setting Contents ON OFF OFF 4 OFF Unit No. OFF 6 OFF OFF OFF : N 9 OFF Slave SW DIP switch: No Setting Contents ON Same as that set on V ON Normally 900 bps ON 4 ON With parity OFF Self-diagnosis 6 OFF Turn-around delay OFF Response delay time 0 msec OFF 9 OFF HEX mode

96 . KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC - Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC High-density D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL SD TXD RD RXD RS 4 RTS 4 CS CTS 0V * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

97 -6. KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC RS-4 Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) 0V +SD +RTS 0 -SD RTS +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. +CTS CTS +OUT OUT IN +IN 4 6 * Use shielded twist-pair cables. IN 4 0 +IN Wiring Diagram 4 * +SD -SD +RD -RD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) 4 PLC D-sub -pin (male) 0V +OUT OUT IN +IN 4 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

98 . KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC - Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC FG +SD T -SD T +RD 4 T -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 6 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC High-density D-sub -pin (male) RXD 6 +SD 0V -SD TXD+ 9 +RD 4 TXD 0 -RD RTS+ * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RTS RXD+ CTS+ CTS 4

99 -. KOYO ELECTRONICS PLC Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) +SD RXD+ 9 -SD RXD 0 +RD 4 CTS+ -RD TXD+ 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. TXD RTS+ RTS CTS+ 6 9 Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) +SD TXD+ -SD TXD +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. RXD+ RXD * Use shielded twist-pair cables. SU-6M: Terminal block connectable 4

100 4. LG PLC 4-4. LG PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Connection MASTER-K0/60/00 K0/60/00 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] MASTER-K00/000 K00/000 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] MASTER-KxxxS K00S/K00S/K000S CPU port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] MASTER-KxxxS CNET K4F-CUEA RS-C [Wiring Diagram 4] GLOFA CNET G4L-CUEA RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] GLOFA GM series CPU GM4/GM6/GM CPU port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: MASTER-K0/60/00 Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps (fixed) Parity None (fixed) Transmission code Data length (fixed) Stop bit (fixed) MASTER-K00/000 Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps * 900 bps Parity None (fixed) Transmission code Data length (fixed) Stop bit (fixed) * For signal level RS-4, baud rate is fixed to 9600 bps. MASTER-KxxxS Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 400 bps 400 bps Parity None (fixed) Transmission code Data length (fixed) Stop bit (fixed)

101 4-4. LG PLC MASTER-KxxxS CNET / GLOFA CNET / GM Series CPU Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 400 bps 400 bps Parity Not provided Not provided Transmission code Data length Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. MASTER-K0/60/00 Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 M (auxiliary relay) P (input/output relay) Input: Read only K (keep relay) TC (timer/current value) 4 CC (counter/current value) TS (timer/set value) 6 CS (counter/set value) MASTER-K00/000 Memory TYPE Remarks P (input/output relay) 0 Input: Read only M (relay) L (link relay) K (keep relay) F (special relay) 4 Read only T (timer/current value) C (counter/set value) 6 D (data register)

102 4. LG PLC 4- MASTER-KxxxS Memory TYPE Remarks P (input/output relay) 0 Input: Read only M (auxiliary relay) L (link relay) K (keep relay) F (special relay) 4 Read only T (timer/current value) C (counter/set value) 6 D (data register) TC (timer/contact) 9 CC (counter/contact) 0 MASTER-KxxxS CNET Memory TYPE Remarks P (input/output relay) 0 PW as word device, input: read only M (auxiliary relay) MW as word device L (link relay) LW as word device K (keep relay) KW as word device F (special relay) 4 FW as word device, read only T (timer/current value) C (counter/setting value) 6 D (data register) TC (timer/contact) 9 CC (counter/contact) 0 GLOFA CNET / GM Series CPU Memory TYPE Remarks M (internal memory) 0 MW as word device Q (output) QW as word device I (input) IW as word device

103 LG PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD RXD RD TXD GND * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD TXD RD RXD GND * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

104 4. LG PLC 4- Wiring Diagram * SD RD RS V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) 4 RXD TXD GND PLC D-sub -pin (male) CS RTS CTS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 4 V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) * SD RD RS CS SHELL 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CD RXD TXD GND RTS CTS DTR 4 DSR 6

105 LG PLC Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD RXD 4 RD TXD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS-4 Wiring Diagram 6 V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC D-sub -pin (male) +SD SD+ 0 -SD SD +RD 4 -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

106 4. LG PLC 4- Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) PLC * SHELL +SD RDA -SD RDB +RD 4 SDA -RD SDB * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

107 4-4. LG PLC Please use this page freely.

108 . Matsushita Electric Works PLC -. Matsushita Electric Works PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection PLCWay FP RS-C port on the CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] FP AFP46 (communication unit) RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] AFP46 (C-NET link unit) RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] FP AFP46 (communication unit) RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] FP0 RS-C port on the CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] AFP46 (communication unit) RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C port on the CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] FP0S AFP46 (communication unit) RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] MEWNET FP0 FP FPΣ FP-e AFP46 (C-NET link unit) RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] RS-C tool port on the CPU unit Matsushita s RS-C cable AFC * RS-C port on the CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C tool port on the CPU unit Matsushita s RS-C cable AFC * RS-C port on the CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C tool port on the CPU unit Matsushita s RS-C cable AFC * AFPG0 COM RS-C [Wiring Diagram 4] AFPG0 COM, RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] AFPG0 COM RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] AFPG06 RS-C tool port on the CPU unit COM port COM RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] COM RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] Matsushita s RS-C cable AFC * RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] * For connection to MJ of a V06, use an MJ-PLC adaptor plus AFC.

109 -. Matsushita Electric Works PLC Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port [0] 0, [] Parity Even Even Transmission Data bit (ASCII) code Stop bit Transmission mode Computer link function (fixed) Control signal Invalid (fixed) * If a tool port (the ladder port for RS-C) is used, the range of PLC parameter setting is limited as below. Adjust the PLC parameter setting to communication parameter setting of the V series. Baud rate: 9600, 900 bps (maximum kbps available with FP) Parity: Odd (fixed) Data bit: (or ) Stop bit: (fixed) DIP Switch Setting AFP46, AFP46 (Communication Unit) Switch Setting Contents ON OFF Same as that set on V (normally 900 bps) OFF 4 OFF Data length: bits ON With parity 6 ON Even OFF Stop bit OFF CS, CD invalid AFP46 (C-NET Link Unit) Switch Setting Contents OFF Same as that set on V (normally 900 bps) OFF Data length: bits ON With parity 4 ON Even OFF Stop bit 6 OFF - OFF - OFF -

110 . Matsushita Electric Works PLC - FP0, FP0S (RS-C on the CPU Unit) Switch Setting Contents 4 OFF Same as that set on V (normally 900 bps) OFF Data length: bits 6 ON With parity ON Even OFF Stop bit System Register Setting Tool Port FP0/FP/FP-e System Register * 4 Data length bits 44 Baud rate 900 * Contents * For FP0, system register setting is enabled in the RUN mode. * For FP, baud rate setting is enabled when DIP switch is off on the back of the CPU unit. FPΣ System Register * Data length bits 4 Parity Even Stop bit 44 Baud rate 900 Contents * System register setting is enabled in the RUN mode. COM Port FP/FP0/FP/FP-e System Register * 4 Transfer selection Computer link Data length bits Parity Even 4 Stop bit End code* CR Start code* without STX 44 Baud rate 900 Contents * For FP/FP0, system register setting is enabled in the RUN mode. * For FP/FP-e, end and start code settings are disabled.

111 -4. Matsushita Electric Works PLC FPΣ System Register * COM COM 40 4 Unit No. * 4 Transfer selection Computer link Data length bits 4 44 Parity Even Stop bit 4 Baud rate 900 * Contents * System register setting is enabled in the RUN mode. * For AFPG06 COM, DIP switch setting is also required. SW- OFF: 900 bps, ON: kbps * In addition to system register setting, unit number setting is also possible with the port setting switch. For more information, refer to the corresponding PLC manual. Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks DT (data register) 0 X (external input relay) WX as word device, read only Y (external output relay) WY as word device R (internal relay) WR as word device, including special relays L (link relay) 4 WL as word device LD (link register) FL (file register) 6 SV (timer/counter set value) EV (timer/counter elapsed time) T (timer/contact) 9 Read only C (counter/contact) 0 Read only

112 . Matsushita Electric Works PLC - Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CD ER 9 Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) * SHELL SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

113 -6. Matsushita Electric Works PLC Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC * SHELL SD SD RD RD RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 4 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CS

114 . Matsushita Electric Works PLC - Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC COM COM * SHELL SD S S RD R R RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS-4 Wiring Diagram 6 +SD V06 MJ V Series CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC + -SD +RD 4 -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

115 -. Matsushita Electric Works PLC Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) PLC * SHELL +SD + -SD - +RD -RD 4 - E Terminal station * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

116 6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC 6-6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC Available PLCs A Series Link, QnA Series Link, QnH (Q) Series Link, A Link + Net0 * Select PLC Type CPU Unit/Port Connection PLCWay A series link QnA series link QnH (Q) series link AA, AA AU, AU, A4U A, A, A AN, AN, AN AH, AM, A A0J, A0JH AUS AJC4-S6 AJC4-S AJUC4 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] AJUC4 AJC4 AJC4-S AJC4-S6 AJC4-S AJUC4 A0JC4-S RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] ASJUC4-R RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] ASJUC4-R4 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] ASJUC4-PRF RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] ASJC4-R RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] AS, ASJ, AS ASJC4-R4 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] ASJC4-PRF RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] ACCPUC4 CPU built-in link port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] QnH (A mode) QA, QA, Q4A QASx ASJUC4-R RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] ASJUC4-R4 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] AJQC4N AJQC4 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] ASJQC4 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] AJQC4-R4(CH) RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] AJQC4-R4(CH) RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] QnH (Q mode) QJC4 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Q00, Q0, Q00J QJC4N RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Q00, Q0 Tool port * Hakko Electronics cable RS-C QCPU * A link + Net0 Standard type link +unit for A series link * * For more information on A link + Net0, refer to page 6-4. * For notes on the connection between the tool port of a Q00/Q0 CPU and the V series using the serial communication function, refer to page 6-4. For the description of the ladder transfer function, refer to Appendix Ladder Transfer Function. * For connection to MJ of a V06, use an MJ-PLC adaptor plus QCPU.

117 6-6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC A Series CPU, QnA Series CPU, QnH Series CPU, Q00J/00/0 CPU Select PLC Type CPU Unit/Port Connection PLCWay A series CPU AA, AA AU, AU, A4U AUS(H) AN, AN, AN AV, A AH, AM A0JH AS(H), ASJ(H), AS(H) ACCPUC4 AFX Tool port * QnA series CPU QA, QA, Q4A QAS(H) QnH (A) series CPU Q06H-A Tool port QnH (Q) series CPU Q00J/00/0 CPU Q0, Q0H Q06H QH QH Q00J Q00 Q0 Tool port * Tool port RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable MB-CPUQ or [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C Hakko Electronics cable QCPU * * For more information of V-MDD (dual port interface), refer to page 6-6. * For the ladder transfer function used when directly connecting the QnH series CPU, refer to Appendix Ladder Transfer Function. * For connection to MJ of a V06, use an MJ-PLC adaptor plus QCPU. FX Series Select PLC Type CPU Unit/Port Connection PLCWay FX series CPU FXN series CPU FXS series CPU FX/ Tool port * FX0N FXN/N FXNC FXS Tool port * RS-C Hakko Electronics cable PC-CX4A RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable MB-CPUQ or [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable MI4-FX * or Hakko Electronics cable MB-CPUQ + MITSUBISHI s conversion cable FX-0P-CADP FXN--BD RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] FX series link (A Protocol) FXN FXN FXS FX0N FXNC FXN-4-BD RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] FXN-4-BD RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable MI4-FX * FXN--BD RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] FXN-4-BD RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] FXN-4-BD RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable MI4-FX * FX0N-ADP RS-C [Wiring Diagram 4] FX0N-4ADP RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] FX0N-ADP RS-C [Wiring Diagram 4] FX0N-4ADP RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ]

118 6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC 6- Select PLC Type CPU Unit/Port Connection PLCWay FX-UC Series CPU * For more information of V-MDD (dual port interface), refer to page 6-6. For the ladder transfer function used when directly connecting the FX series CPU, refer to Appendix Ladder Transfer Function. * For connection to MJ of a V06, use an MJ-MI4FX. Communication Setting FX-UC Tool port * RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable MI4-FX * or Hakko Electronics cable MB-CPUQ + MITSUBISHI s conversion cable FX-0P-CADP The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: A Series Link Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 for both stations 0, 0 Parity Even Even Transmission RS-C MODE Trans. Mode mode * RS-4 MODE Trans. Mode Transmission Data length code Stop bit Sumcheck Provided (fixed) Write while running Possible (fixed) Terminating resistance at sender Provided (fixed) Terminating resistance at receiver Provided (fixed) * Trans. Mode : without CR/LF, Trans. Mode 4: with CR/LF If [Trans. Mode 4] is selected for [Trans. Mode] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the V series, select [MODE4] in the case of RS-C, or [MODE] in the case of RS-4. QnA Series Link, QnH (Q) Series Link Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate* 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 for both stations 0, 0 Parity Even Even Transmission mode RS-C RS-4 QnA series link: MODE (binary mode) (fixed) QnH (Q) series link: MC protocol (fixed) Transmission Data length (fixed) code Stop bit Sumcheck Provided (fixed) Write while running Possible (fixed)

119 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC * The maximum baud rate available with the V series is 00 bps. Select the appropriate baud rate depending on the used PLC and environment. Connection to Q00/Q0 CPU When connecting the tool port of a Q00/Q0 CPU and the V series using the PLC serial communication function, the following setting is required. V-SFT Setting Select [QnH(Q) series link] in the [Select PLC Type] dialog. GX Developer (MITSUBISHI programming software). Double-click [PLC Parameter].. In the [Qn(H) Parameter] dialog, click the [Serial] tab.. Check [Use serial communication]. Set the options such as a baud rate. Be sure to check these boxes. Set the V communication parameters as shown in this box. A Series CPU, QnA Series CPU Communication parameters for the V series are automatically set. QnH (A) Series CPU, QnH (Q) Series CPU, Q00J/00/0 CPU Communication parameters for the V series except the baud rate are automatically set. * The maximum baud rate available with the V series is 00 bps. Select the appropriate baud rate depending on the used PLC and environment. FX Series CPU, FXN Series CPU, FXS Series CPU, FX-UC Series CPU Communication parameters for the V series are automatically set.

120 6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC 6- FX Series Link (A Protocol) Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Parity Even Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit Protocol Dedicated protocol (fixed) H/W type * Normal/RS-C RS-C Sumcheck Added (fixed) Transmission mode Mode Trans. Mode * Select RS-4 when the link unit FXN-4-BD, FXN-4-BD, FXN-4-BD, FXN-4-BD or FX0N-4-ADP is used. * We recommend to set ms or above for [Send Delay Time] in the [Detail] tab window of the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the V series. A Series Link, QnA Series Link: Switch Setting The following is an example that shows the settings for both rotary DIP switches and DIP switches on the PLC. AJUC4 Example level: RS-C, baud rate: 900 bps, transmission mode STATION No 0 STATION No MODE ON A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F SW SW SW SW4 SW SW6 OFF SW SW ON SW SW SW SW4 ASJC4-R, ASJUC4-R Example level: RS-C, baud rate: 900 bps, transmission mode STATION No STATION No MODE ON 0 A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F SW0 SW04 SW0 SW06 SW0 ON SW0 SW09 SW0 SW SW OFF

121 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC AJQC4, ASJQC4, AJQC4N Example Baud rate: 900 bps STATION No 0 STATION No MODE ON A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F SW0 SW0 SW0 SW04 SW0 SW06 OFF SW0 SW0 ON SW09 SW0 SW SW ASJUC4-R4, ASJC4-R4 Example 4 level: RS-4, baud rate: 900 bps, transmission mode STATION No 0 STATION No MODE ON A B C D E F A B C D E F A B C D E F SW0 SW0 SW0 SW04 SW0 ON SW06 SW0 SW0 SW09 SW0 SW SW OFF

122 6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC 6- Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. A Series Link, QnA Series Link, QnH (Q) Series Link, A Series CPU, QnA Series CPU, QnH (A) Series CPU, QnH (Q) Series CPU, Q00J/00/0 CPU, A Link + Net0 Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 W (link register) R (file register) * TN (timer/current value) CN (counter/current value) 4 SPU (special unit buffer memory) * M (internal relay) 6 L (latch relay) B (link relay) X (input relay) 9 Y (output relay) 0 TS (timer/contact) TC (timer/coil) CS (counter/contact) CC (counter/coil) 4 H (link unit buffer memory) SD (special register) 6 QnA, QnH (Q) series only (both link unit and CPU) SM (special relay) QnA, QnH (Q) series only (both link unit and CPU) SB (special relay) QnA, QnH (Q) series only (both link unit and CPU) SW (special link register) 9 QnA, QnH (Q) series only (both link unit and CPU) ZR (file register (for continuous access)) 0 QnA, QnH (Q) series only (both link unit and CPU) * When the A series CPU is in ROM operation, R register cannot be used. * The unit number is required in addition to the memory type and address. Convert byte address into word address when entering the data on the V-SFT editor if the memory device of link unit is given byte address.

123 6-6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC FX Series, FXS Series Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 TN (timer/current value) CN (counter/current value) CN (counter bits) * M (internal relay) 4 S (state) X (input relay) 6 Read only Y (output relay) TS (timer/contact) CS (counter/contact) 9 DX (file register) 0 * * For numerical data format where double-words can be used (Num. Data Display, Graph, Sampling), data is processed as double-words. For those where bits or words can be used, data is processed as words consisting of lower 6 bits. For input Upper 6 bits are ignored. For output 0 is written for upper 6 bits. * Use DX for D000 to 999. FXN Series, FX-UC Series Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 TN (timer/current value) CN (counter/current value) CN (counter bits) * M (internal relay) 4 S (state) X (input relay) 6 Read only Y (output relay) TS (timer/contact) CS (counter/contact) 9 R (extension register) FX-UC series CPU only * For numerical data format where double-words can be used (Num. Data Display, Graph, Sampling), data is processed as double-words. For those where bits or words can be used, data is processed as words consisting of lower 6 bits. For input Upper 6 bits are ignored. For output 0 is written for upper 6 bits.

124 6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC 6-9 FX Series (A Protocol) Wiring Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 TN (timer/current value) CN (counter/current value) * CN (counter bits) * M (internal relay) 4 S (state) X (input relay) 6 Read only Y (output relay) TS (timer/contact) CS (counter/contact) 9 * CN00 to CN equals CN (-bit counter). * For numerical data format where double-words can be used (Num. Data Display, Graph, Sampling), data is processed as double-words. For those where bits or words can be used, data is processed as words consisting of lower 6 bits. For input Upper 6 bits are ignored. For output 0 is written for upper 6 bits. Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD RD RS CS 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CD RD SD DR 6 RS CS

125 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS DR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CD Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) SD RD RD SD RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

126 6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC 6- Wiring Diagram 4 * SD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD RD RD RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC SDA +SD SDB -SD RDA +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RDB

127 6-6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC Wiring Diagram 6 +SD -SD +RD -RD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL V Series CN 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. PLC D-sub -pin (male) RDA RDB SDA DSRA DTRA 4 SDB 6 DSRB DTRB * Use shielded twist-pair cables. 0 Wiring Diagram V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) FG +SD -SD +RTS 4 PLC D-sub -pin (male) +RxD +TxD 4 +DSR +DTR -RTS -CTS +CTS +RD -RD 9 4 -RxD 6 -TxD -DSR -DTR 0 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

128 6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC 6- According to our noise tests, the attachment of a ferrite core improves noise voltage by 60 to 900 V and aids in preventing communication errors. When connecting to the A/QnA series CPU directly, attach a ferrite core to the communication cable between the V series and A/QnA series CPU to avoid noise problems. V series Ferrite core A/QnA series CPU Ferrite cores are optionally available. When ordering the ferrite core, state GD-FC (ID: mm, OD: 0 mm). In consideration of such noise problems, it is recommended that the standard type link unit be used when the cable length of m or longer is required. Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) PLC * SHELL RDA +SD SDA -SD +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RDB SDB

129 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC A Link + Net0 When the V series is connected to the standard type link unit on the CPU that is connected to the data link system or network system, the V series can have access to CPUs on NET II (/B) and NET/0. In this case, select A Link + Net0 for [PLC Type] on the VSFT editor. When the V series has access to the CPU on NET II (/B) or NET/0: - With NET II (/B), the V series can only have access to CPUs in the network (No. in the illustration below) of the CPU equipped with the standard type link unit that is connected to the V series. (Available CPU No. 0 to 0) - With NET/0, the V series can have access to CPUs in the network (No. in the illustration below) of the CPU equipped with the standard type link unit that is connected to the V series as well as those in the other networks (Nos. and in the illustration below) that are connected. (Available CPU No. to 0) Standard type link unit V CPU (-) CPU (-) CPU (-) CPU (-) Network No. CPU (-) Network No. (-) CPU (-4) CPU (-) CPU (-) (-4) CPU (-) (-) CPU (-4) CPU (-) Network No. CPU (-) CPU (-4) When the V series reads from or writes to the CPU ( - in the above illustration) equipped with the standard type link unit: Set for [CPU No.] for memory setting on the V-SFT editor. The response time is the same as that with : connection between the V series and the PLC. When the V series reads from or writes to the CPU memory of the CPU number other than : Transient transmission is performed and the response time is not fast. Please understand beforehand. To have access to the PLC in the other network on NET/0, specify the network number in the OPEN macro for the screen on the V-SFT editor. This macro command should be [OUT_ENQ] of system call [SYS]. It is not possible to have access to the CPU on the different network from the same screen.

130 6. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC 6- Network specifying macro... [OUT_ENQ] of system call [SYS] F memory n + 0 Always 0 n + Network selection: n + System code n + Network number n + 0 and n + are fixed to 0 and, respectively. n + (system code) should be: : NET/0 : NET II (/B) For n + (network number), set 0 when NET II (/B) is selected for n + (system code) or the network number to be accessed when NET/0 is selected. Do not use this macro for any purpose other than OPEN macro for a screen. Doing so triggers network switching at the time of macro execution, resulting in a communication error. For more information on the macro function, refer to the Reference Manual (Function). Also refer to the explanation on network registration contained in the operation manual for MITSUBISHI s Standard Link/Multi-drop Link Unit. For the NET II (/B) data link system and NET/0 network system, refer to MITSUBISHI s manual. Available Memory For the available memory of the PLC to be accessed, refer to Available Memory (page 6-). Note that the CPU number must be set on the V-SFT editor. Wiring Refer to the wiring diagram with the standard type link unit.

131 POWER GD SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PLC V-MDD (Dual Port Interface) V-MDD is the add-on connector with two ports, specifically designed for the connector on MITSUBISHI s A series, QnA series or FX series CPU programming port. MITSUBISHI A/QnA/FX series CPU A6GPP, APHP, computer, etc. GPP When connecting to the CPU of the MITSUBISHI A/QnA series: Insert the connector on the backside into the CPU port directly or use the MDD-CPU (optional) cable for connection. When connecting to the CPU of the MITSUBISHI FX/ series: Use the MDD-CPU cable (optional) for connection. When connecting to the CPU of the MITSUBISHI FXN/N/0N/S series: Use MITSUBISHI s conversion cable FX-0P-CADP. Slide switch : A series : QnA series : FX series MB-CPUQ cable (optional) * Set the slide switch before turning the power on. V * V-MDD cannot be used with the MI4-FX cable. The power to the V-MDD is supplied from the CPU. Check the electric capacity of V at the CPU. (Current consumption: Max. 0 ma) Keep the cable between the CPU and V-MDD as short as possible. (Max. to. m) Be sure to consider noise problems when performing wiring. When V-MDD is used for connection with the V series, set. seconds or above for the timeout time in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog. Please read the instruction manual for V-MDD before use.

132 . MODICON PLC -. MODICON PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port Parity Even Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks 4 (holding register) 0 (input register) 0 (output coil) 4 (input relay) 6 Read only

133 -. MODICON PLC Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD RX RD TX RS 4 DTR 4 CS GND DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RTS CTS

134 . MOELLER PLC -. MOELLER PLC Available PLCs PS4 Select PLC Type PLC Connection PS4-0-MM (PRG port) RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] + ZB4-0-KB Cable made by MOELLER Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port Parity Not provided Not provided Transmission code Data length Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks M (marker) 0 MW as word device

135 -. MOELLER PLC Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD TX RD RX * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

136 9. OMRON PLC 9-9. OMRON PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection PLCWay SYSMAC C SYSMAC CV SYSMAC CS/CJ SYSMAC CS/CJ DNA * C0H,CH,C40H RS-C port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] C0, C0F C00H C00, C00F C000H C000, C000H C00H C00HS-CPU0, 0 C00HS-CPU, C00HS-CPU, C00HS-CPU, C00HS-CPU, CQM-CPU CQM-CPU4, 4, 4, 44 C00, C00F C000H C000, C000H C0-LK0-V C0-LK0-V C00H-LK0 C00H-LK0-V C00H-LK0 C00H-LK0-V RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-C port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] C00-LK0 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-C port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] C00HX C00HG Mounted on the CPU slot RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] C00HE (C00HW-COM0 to 06) RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] SRM-C0 RS-C port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] CPMA CPMA CPMC CV00, CV000 CV000 CVM CS CJH, CJM CPU unit (peripheral port) OMRON s cable *, * [CQM-CIF0] RS-C port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] CPU unit (peripheral port) CPU unit (peripheral port) CPU unit with built-in port (hose link port) CV00-LK0 RS-C port CSW-SCU Mounted on the CPU slot (CSW-SCB) Mounted on the CPU slot (CSW-SCB4) OMRON s cable [CQM-CIF0]*, * OMRONs adaptor unit [CPMC-CIF0] + RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] OMRON s cable [CSW-CN] + RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] RS-C PORT [Wiring Diagram ] PORT [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 PORT [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] CJW-SCU4 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Ladder Transfer *4

137 9-9. OMRON PLC * Replace the shell on the D-sub -pin side before use. (Recommended part: DDK s J-) * For connection to MJ of a V06, use an MJ-PLC adaptor plus CQM-CIF0. * For SYSMAC CS/CJ DNA, refer to page 9-. *4 For the ladder transfer function, refer to Appendix Ladder Transfer Function. Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate* 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even Transmission Data length (ASCII) code Stop bit Command level (fixed) Protocol : n protocol (fixed) Synchronizing switch Internal synchronization (fixed) CTS switch 0 V (always ON) (fixed) V supply switch OFF (fixed) Terminating resistance ON for RS-4 * The maximum baud rate available with the V series is 00 bps. Select the appropriate baud rate depending on the used PLC and environment. V-SFT Setting Set [Trans. Mode] in the [Detail] tab window of the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the V-SFT editor. Transmission Mode Contents Trans. Mode BCD w/o sign Trans. Mode BCD w/ signs * * BCD w/ signs Data in the PLC memory can be shown as data with signs. When higher 4 bits in the memory indicates [F] or [A], it is treated as negative. [F]: Regards higher 4 bits as [ 0]. [A]: Regards higher 4 bits as [ ]. Displayable range word: 999 to words: to Example: PLC Memory Indication on V 0000 to to 9999 F00 to F999 to 999 A000 to A to to to F to F to A to A to Setting procedure: Num. Data Display [Input Type] BCD [Display Type] DEC (w/ sign, w/ + signs)

138 9. OMRON PLC 9- Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. SYSMAC C Memory TYPE Remarks DM (data memory) 0 CH (input/output relay) HR (holding relay) LR (latch relay) AR (auxiliary memory relay) 4 T (timer/current value) C (counter/current value) 6 EMn (extended data memory) * TU (timer/contact) 9 Read only CU (counter/contact) 0 Read only SYSMAC CV * When using EMn (extended data memory), specify the bank number (C: 0 to ). The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown on the right. Example: EM0 : 0000 Address Colon Bank number Memory TYPE Remarks DM (data memory) 0 CH (input/output relay) AR (alarm relay) 4 T (timer/current value) C (counter/current value) 6 EMn (extended data memory) * TU (timer/contact) 9 Read only CU (counter/contact) 0 Read only * When using EMn (extended data memory), specify the bank number (CV: 0 to ). The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown on the right. Example: EM0 : 0000 Address Colon Bank number

139 OMRON PLC SYSMAC CS/CJ, SYSMAC CS/CJ DNA Memory TYPE Remarks DM (data memory) 0 CH (input/output relay) H (holding relay) A (alarm relay) 4 T (timer/current value) C (counter/current value) 6 EMn (extended data memory) * W (internal relay) TU (timer/contact) 9 Read only CU (counter/contact) 0 Read only * When using EMn (extended data memory), specify the bank number (CS: 0 to C). The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown on the right. Example: EM0 : 0000 Address Colon Bank number Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

140 9. OMRON PLC 9- Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS 9 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

141 OMRON PLC RS-4 Wiring Diagram 4 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) RDB +SD -SD SDB +RD 4 RDA 6 -RD SDA 9 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) 9 +SD RDB -SD RDA 6 +RD 4 SDB -RD SDA * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

142 9. OMRON PLC 9- Wiring Diagram 6 V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) 9 +SD RDB -SD RDA 6 +RD 4 SDB -RD SDA * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS CS 4 Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) +SD RDB -SD RDA 6 +RD 4 SDB -RD SDA * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

143 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F 9-9. OMRON PLC SYSMAC CS/CJ DNA When connecting the V series to CS/CJ on a network (Controller Link), the V series can also access another CS on the network. CS (-) CS (-) CS (-) (-) Network No. Network No. CS (-) CS (-) CS (-4) V series V-SFT Setting Select [System Setting] [Comm. Parameter] [Detail] tab, and select [ : n] for [Connection]. Select [System Setting] [Network Table Setting] [PLC]. The network table edit window is displayed. Double-clicking on the number brings up the dialog where CS/CJ on the network can be registered. Double-click.

144 0. SAIA PLC 0-0. SAIA PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection PGU port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] PCD PCD PCD.F0 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] PCD4.F0 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 Transmission code Data length Stop bit S-BUS Configuration S-BUS Mode GU Port Number Parity 0 (PGU port), (PCD.F0, PCD4.F0) Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks R (register word) 0 Rfp (float) T (timer-counter word) C (timer-counter coil) I (input bit) 4 read only O (output bit) F (flag bit) 6

145 0-0. SAIA PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * SD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) RX PLC PGU port RD TX * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. GND * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram * SD RD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. TX RX GND * Use shielded twist-pair cables. PLC PCD.F0 0

146 0. SAIA PLC 0- RS-4 Wiring Diagram +SD -SD V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL T/R+ T/R PLC PCD.F0 GND 0 +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

147 SAIA PLC Please use this page freely.

148 . SAMSUNG PLC -. SAMSUNG PLC Available PLCs SPC series Select PLC Type PLC Connection SPC series RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4/4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Parity Not provided Not provided Stop bit Terminating resistance ON for RS-4 Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks R (input/output) 0 L (link relay) M (internal relay) K (keep relay) F (special relay) 4 W (data register)

149 -. SAMSUNG PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD TXD RD RXD RS 4 GND CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) +SD TR 6 -SD TR+ +RD 4 -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

150 . SHARP PLC -. SHARP PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type JW series JW00/0H COM port JW0 COM port JW00 series W0H, W00H JW0, JW0, JW00 JW0H, JW0H, JW00H CPU Unit/Port Connection PLCWay ZW-0CM JW-0CM RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] JW0, JW0H, JW0H JW-CM RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] JW0 JW0H JW-4K, JW-4K JW-44K, JW-44K JW-64K, JW-64K JW-CUH JW-CUH JW-CUM JW-CUH JW-CUH JW-CUH JW-CUH MMI port RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] Communication port RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] PG/COMM port RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] PG/COMM port RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] J-board Z-J, Z-J Host communication port T RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] JW0 JW00 JW0H JW00H JW-0CU JW-00CU JW-0CUH JW-00CUH Communication port Communication port JW0H JW-CU Communication port J-board Z-J Z-J Z-J Z-J JW-CU*, JW-CU*, JW-CU, JW-CU, JW-CU, JW-CU, JW-4CU, JW-4CU, JW-CU, JW-6CU RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 9] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 0] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 9] Host communication port CN RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Host communication port TC RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] PG/COMM port PG/COMM port PG/COMM port PG/COMM port PG/COMM port RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] PG/COMM port RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] JW-CM RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] * Not provided with PG/COMM port

151 -. SHARP PLC Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: JW Series/JW00/0H COM Port/JW0 COM Port Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 for STA.NO 0, for STA.NO Parity Even Even Data length Stop bit Error check Sumcheck (fixed) Transmission mode Computer link (fixed) * For JW-0CM or ZW-0CM: In the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the V-SFT editor, set [Send Delay Time] to msec or more. * For JW0 series with MMI port or communication port: Turn off the terminating resistances of the V series. - V/V0/V0: DIPSW, - V06 (MJ): DIPSW, - V06 (DU-0): DIPSW, JW00 Series Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port Parity Odd Odd Data length Stop bit Error check Sumcheck (fixed) Transmission mode Computer link (fixed)

152 . SHARP PLC - JW Series: Switch Setting JW-0CM, ZW-0CM, JW-CM Switch Setting Contents SW0 4 Computer link (command mode) SW Station address (lower half) SW 0 Station address (upper half) SW- OFF Not used SW- ON 4-wire system SW- OFF Not used SW-4 ON Even parity SW4 0 Baud rate 0: 900 : 9600 : 400 : 400 4: 00 : 600 SW ON Terminating resistance provided Z-J, Z-J Switch Setting Contents SW0 4 Command mode SW Station address (lower half) SW 0 Station address (upper half) SW- OFF Not used SW- OFF -wire system only SW- OFF Not used SW-4 ON Even parity SW4 0 Baud rate 0: 900 : 9600 : 400 : 400 4: 00 : 600 SW ON Terminating resistance provided JW Series, JW00/0H COM Port, JW0 COM Port, JW00 Series: System Memory Setting JW-0 The settings for communications with the V series should be made at the system memory as shown below. MMI port System Memory Setting Contents #6 0H Data length: bits, stop bit: bits Parity: even, baud rate: 900 # 0H Port number Communication port System Memory Setting Contents #4 00H Computer link mode #6 0H Data length: bits, stop bit: bits Parity: even, baud rate: 900 # 0H Port number

153 -4. SHARP PLC JW-0CU/00CU, JW0CUH/00CUH, JW-CU, Z-J, Z-J System Memory Setting Contents #6 0H Stop bit: bits, parity: even, baud rate: 900 # 0H Port number JW-0H, Z-J, Z-J PG/COMM port System Memory Setting Contents #4 0H Stop bit: bits, parity: even, baud rate: 900 # 0H Port number PG/COMM port System Memory Setting Contents #6 0H Stop bit: bits, parity: even, baud rate: 900 # 0H Port number JW00 Series PG/COMM port System Memory Setting Contents #4 9H Stop bit: bits, parity: odd, baud rate: 900 # 0H Port number PG/COMM port System Memory Setting Contents #6 9H Stop bit: bits, parity: odd, baud rate: 900 # 0H Port number Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks X9XXX (register) 0 XXXXX (relay) for word device EXXXX (self diagnosis) bxxxx (timer, counter/current value) Fn (file register) * * File register setting on V-SFT editor Enter file number + : (colon) + address in order. Example: F : 0000 Address Colon File number

154 . SHARP PLC - Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD TXD RD RXD RS 4 RTS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CTS 4 Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD 4 RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. RTS CTS * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

155 -6. SHARP PLC Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 6 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. RTS CTS * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 4 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD 4 RS 4 CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

156 . SHARP PLC - RS-4 Wiring Diagram * V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) SHELL PLC +SD L -SD L +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. L L4 GND Wiring Diagram 6 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) +SD RX -SD TX +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. PG/COMM 4 GND -RX -TX

157 -. SHARP PLC Wiring Diagram * V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) SHELL PLC +SD L -SD L +RD 4 -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC +SD L -SD L +RD 4 S -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. FG * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 9 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) +SD +TXD 0 -SD TXD +RD 4 +RXD -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. RXD * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

158 . SHARP PLC -9 Wiring Diagram 0 * V06 MJ RJ-4 pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) Terminating resistance 6 +SD +TXD 0 -SD TXD +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. +RXD RXD * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) +SD +SD -SD +RD 9 +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. RD 0 SD * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC Terminal block +SD TD -SD /TD +RD -RD 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of V06 modular jack is used as. RD /RD 4 * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

159 -0. SHARP PLC Please use this page freely.

160 . SHINKO ELECTRIC PLC -. SHINKO ELECTRIC PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection SELMART SELMART-00 and later Version 0M-UCI-6 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Parity Even Even Transmission Data length (ASCII) code Stop bit Sumcheck Provided (fixed) Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 * Only D register of SELMART is available. No other devices can be used. Be sure to note the above though the setting on the V-SFT editor is possible.

161 -. SHINKO ELECTRIC PLC Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

162 4. Siemens PLC 4-4. Siemens PLC Available PLCs S (S V4) Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection S-90U S-9U S-00U S-U S-U S-U S-9U CP-SI (964R Transmission Protocol) CP-4 (964R/RK) CP-44 (964R/RK) Second serial interface (964R Transmission Protocol) S PG port S series Programming port on the CPU unit * RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] SIEMENS s 6ES 4-BD0 cable * + RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] S S-00 CP-4 (964R/RK) RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] S-400 CP-44 (964R/RK) RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] S-00 PPI S-00 series PPI RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] S-00/400MPI S-00/400 series MPI port RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 9] S-00MPI (HMI ADP) SIEMENS s HMI Adapter 6ES 9 0CA-0XA0 S-00MPI (PC ADP) S-00/400 series (MPI port) SIEMENS s PC Adapter 6ES 90CA-0XA0 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] S-00MPI (Helmholz SSW ADP) Helmholz s Adapter fur MPI-Bus SSW TI00/0 (TI00/0V4) TI4/ CPU port (bulit-in) RS-C [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] * When using the 6ES 4-BD0 cable made by Siemens, connect the cable shown in [Wiring Diagram ] to the D-sub -pin side of the 6ES 4-BD0 cable for communications with the V series. * U/9 not supported Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: S, S V4 (S-90U, S-9U, S-00U) Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Parity Even parity Even Transmission Data length code Stop bit Busy signal NO (fixed) Hand shake OFF (fixed)

163 4-4. Siemens PLC S, S V4 (S-U, S-U, S-U), S (S-00, S-400) Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Parity Even (fixed) Transmission code Data length (fixed) Stop bit (fixed) S PG Port Communication parameters are automatically set. S-00PPI Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port Parity Even (fixed) S-00/400MPI Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps (fixed) Parity Even (fixed) Transmission Data length (fixed) code Stop bit (fixed) Local No. (PLC port number) Set [MPI SETTING] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the V-SFT editor. Item MPI SETTING Highest MPI Address //6/6 Source No. (V port number) 0 Highest MPI Address: Set the maximum value of the port numbers for the PLC or the V series. Source No.: Set the V-series port number. Set different numbers for [Source No.] and [Local No.], and be sure that [Source No.] [Highest MPI Address]. [Highest MPI Address] setting example If port numbers and 0 are selected respectively for the PLC and the V series, select.

164 4. Siemens PLC 4- S-00MPI (HMI ADP, PC ADP, Helmholz SSW ADP) Set [MPI SETTING] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the V-SFT editor. V Comm. Parameter Setting Item Setting on PLC PC ADP HMI ADP Helmholz SSW ADP Baud rate 400 bps 400 bps (fixed) 400 bps Parity Odd (fixed) Transmission Data length (fixed) code Stop bit (fixed) Local No. (PLC port number) Item MPI SETTING Highest MPI Address //6/6 Source No. (V port number) 0 Highest MPI Address: Set the maximum value of the port numbers for the PLC or the V series. Source No.: Set the V-series port number. Set different numbers for [Source No.] and [Local No.], and be sure that [Source No.] [Highest MPI Address]. [Highest MPI Address] setting example If port numbers and 0 are selected respectively for the PLC and the V series, select. TI00/0, TI00/0 V4 Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Parity None (fixed) Transmission code Data length (fixed) Stop bit (fixed)

165 Siemens PLC Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. S, S V4, S Memory TYPE Remarks DB (data register) 0 Use memory address DB and later for S, or DB or later for S. I (input relay) IW as word device, read only Q (output relay) QW as word device, read only F (flag/internal relay) FW as word device, read only, only in S series M (flag/internal relay) MW as word device, read only, only in S series T (timer/current value) 4 Read only C (counter/current value) Read only AS (absolute address) 6 Unavailable with the S series The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown below. Example: For S, S V4: DB For S: DB00 : 0000 Address Block number Address Colon Block number * Notes on V4 (or GD-0) data conversion When converting data of V4 (or GD-0) into the V data, [S V4] is automatically selected for the PLC type. With V4 (or GD-0), the order of bit strings of I (input relay), Q (output relay) and F (internal relay) is byte-reversed. Please take note of this. Example: For S V4: For S, S: Memory setting of V4 (or GD-0) F0000 F00000 F00000 F Memory setting of V F00000 F F0000 F00000 FW0 Memory to be accessed to PLC by V4 (or GD-0) FW0 Memory to be accessed to PLC by V

166 4. Siemens PLC 4- S PG Port Memory TYPE Remarks DB (data register) 0 Use memory address DB and later. I (input relay) IW as word device Q (output relay) QW as word device F (flag/internal relay) FW as word device T (timer/current value) 4 C (counter/current value) AS (absolute address) 6 The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown on the right. Example: DB Address Block number S-00PPI Memory TYPE Remarks V (data memory) 0 VW as word device I (input) IW as word device Possible to write to the unused area Q (output) QW as word device M (bit memory) MW as word device T (timer/current value) 4 C (counter/current value) TB (timer/contact) 6 Read only CB (counter/contact) Read only HC (high-speed counter/contact) Double-word usable AIW (analog input) 9 AQW (analog output) 0 SM (special memory/special relay) SMW as word device S (stage) SW as word device S-00/400MPI Memory TYPE Remarks DB (Data Word) 0 Use memory address DB and later. I (input) IW as word device Q (output) QW as word device M (Marker Word) MW as word device T (timer/current value) 4 C (counter/current value) The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown on the right. Example: DB000 : 0000 Address Colon Block number

167 Siemens PLC TI00/0 (TI00/0 V4) Memory TYPE Remarks V (variable memory) 0 WX (word input) WY (word output) X (discrete input) Y (discrete output) 4 CR (control relay) TCP (timer, counter/set value) 6 TCC (timer, counter/current time) DCP (drum count/set value) * DCC (drum count/current value) 9 Read only DSP (drum step/set value) 0 DSC (drum step/current value) K (fixed memory) STW (system state) * In case of using DCP (drum count/set value), set drum step No. to 6. The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown on the right. Example: DCP0000 : Drum step number Colon Address * Notes on V4 (or GD-0) data conversion When converting data of V4 (or GD-0) into the V data, [TI00/0 V4] is automatically selected for the PLC type. With V4 (or GD-0), the order of words is reversed in the case of double-words. Please take note of this. For V4 (or GD-0): For V: MSB LSB MSB LSB Lower-order word High-order word High-order word Lower-order word word word words words

168 4. Siemens PLC 4- Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL SD TXD RD RXD RS 4 GND CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) * SHELL SD RXD RD TXD RS 4 GND CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

169 4-4. Siemens PLC Wiring Diagram * SD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) TXD RD RS 4 RXD 4 6ES 4-BD0 S-9U CS GND * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 4 V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) * SHELL DCD SD RXD RD TXD RS 4 DTR 4 CS DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RTS CTS

170 4. Siemens PLC 4-9 Wiring Diagram V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) FG HMI Adaptor PC Adaptor Helmholz Adaptor D-sub 9-pin (female) SD RD RD SD RS 4 CS RTS CTS * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS-4 Wiring Diagram 6 * +SD -SD +RD -RD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) 4 PLC D-sub -pin (male) T(A) R(A) 4 T(B) 9 R(B) * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

171 Siemens PLC Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) +SD +TxD/RxD -SD TxD/RxD +RD 4 -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Refer to Terminating Resistance Setting (page 4-) to connect terminating resistance. Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) GND 6 +SD DI+ -SD DI +RD 4 DO+ -RD DO * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

172 4. Siemens PLC 4- Wiring Diagram 9 * +SD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) +RD/SD -SD RD/SD +RD -RD 4 * Use shielded twist-pair cables. * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. Refer to Terminating Resistance Setting (page 4-) to connect terminating resistance. Terminating Resistance Setting Set the DIP switch of the V series (for V06: No. ) to the OFF position. Connect terminating resistance to the serial connector of the V series as shown below. If the terminating resistance is not connected, a communication error may occur. V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL 90 V SD SD +RD 4 0 RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as.

173 4-4. Siemens PLC Please use this page freely.

174 . TAIAN PLC -. TAIAN PLC Available PLCs TP0 Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection TP0 Communication Port (T/R+, T/R ) RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] MMI Port (9-pin) (4- Short Computer Link Mode) RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port Parity Not provided Not provided Transmission code Data length Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register timer counter/contact) 0 V (timer counter/contact) WS (system register) WC (constant register) X (input relay) 4 Y (output relay) C (internal relay) 6 SC (special register)

175 -. TAIAN PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-4 Wiring Diagram * +SD -SD +RD -RD V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) SHELL 4 PLC T/R+ T/R SHLD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) RX+ +SD TX+ -SD PG/COM 4 +RD 4 GND -RD RX * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. TX

176 6. Telemecanique PLC 6-6. Telemecanique PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Connection TSX Micro TSX Micro RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Connection Multi-Link (fixed) Parity Odd Odd Transmission code Data length (fixed) Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks MW (memory word) 0 KW (constant word) M (bit memory)

177 6-6. Telemecanique PLC Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) * +SD -SD +RD -RD SHELL 4 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. PLC MiniDIN 9-pin (male) D+ D 0V

178 . TOSHIBA PLC -. TOSHIBA PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection T series T series Computer link port on CPU RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] EX series EX00, 0, 00 Computer link port on CPU RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting T Series The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: EX Series Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 Parity Odd Odd Transmission code Data length Stop bit PLC Transmission Parameter Setting When setting parameters on the PLC, use the T series programmer and enter the following data for system information. COMPUTER LINK. Station number Baud rate 900 bps Parity Odd Data length bits Stop bit bit Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port 0 Parity Odd Odd Transmission Data length code Stop bit Communication selector switch LINK: computer link

179 -. TOSHIBA PLC Available Memory T Series The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 X (input) XW as word device Y (output) YW as word device R (auxiliary relay) RW as word device L (link relay) 6 LW as word device W (link register) F (file register) TN (timer/current value) 9 Read only CN (counter/current value) 0 Read only TS (timer/contact) Read only CS (counter/contact) Read only EX Series Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 X (input) XW as word device Y (output) YW as word device R (auxiliary relay) RW as word device Z (link relay) 4 SW as word device TN (timer/current value) Read only CN (counter/current value) 6 Read only

180 . TOSHIBA PLC - Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-4 Wiring Diagram +SD -SD +RD -RD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) 4 * R PLC D-sub -pin (male) 4 RXA TXA CTSA RTSA * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. 0 RXB TXB CTSB * Use shielded twist-pair cables. * R: 0 Ω /W RTSB Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC TXA TXB +SD RXA -SD TERM +RD 4 RXB -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

181 -4. TOSHIBA PLC Please use this page freely.

182 . TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC -. TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC Available PLCs TC00 Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection TC00 TCmini Port on the CPU unit TCCMW TCCMO RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port Parity Not provided None (fixed) Transmission code Data length (fixed) Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks D (register ) 0 B (register ) X (input relay) XW as word device Y (output relay) YW as word device R (temporary storage) 4 RW as word device G (extension temporary storage ) GW as word device H (extension temporary storage ) 6 HW as word device L (latch relay) LW as word device S (shift register) SW as word device E (edge relay) 9 EW as word device P (timer counter current value) 0 V (timer counter set value) T (timer) TW as word device C (counter) CW as word device A (special auxiliary relay) 4 AW as word device

183 -. TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (female) SD TXD RD RXD RS 4 DTR 4 CS GND DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CTS RTS

184 9. Toyoda Machine Works PLC 9-9. Toyoda Machine Works PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection PLCWay TOYOPUC L/PC series PCJ CMP-LINK RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even Transmission code Data length (ASCII) Stop bit Set [Trans. Mode] in the [Detail] tab window of the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the V-SFT editor. PCJ: Select [Single Data Area] or [Split Data Area]. L/PC series: Select [Single Data Area]. Transmission Mode Single Data Area Split Data Area Contents Data area is common. Each PLC device is divided into program files. Switch Setting Baud rate: 900 bps Switch Setting Contents SW 0 Station address (lower half) SW 0 Station address (upper half) SW Baud rate : 900 : 9600 : 400 4: 400 : 00 6: 600 Switch Short Bar Contents SET Provided Data length: bits SET Provided Stop bit: bits

185 9-9. Toyoda Machine Works PLC Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 R (link register) B (file register) N (current value register) X (input relay) 4 WX as word device Y (output relay) WY as word device M (internal relay) 6 WM as word device K (keep relay) WK as word device L (link relay) WL as word device T (timer/contact) 9 WT as word device C (counter/contact) 0 WC as word device U (extensional data register) H (extensional set value register) EN (extensional current value register) EX (extensional input relay) 4 WEX as word device EY (extensional output relay) WEY as word device EM (extensional internal relay) 6 WEM as word device EK (extensional keep relay) WEK as word device EL (extensional link relay) WEL as word device ET (extensional timer/contact) 9 WET as word device EC (extensional counter/contact) 0 WEC as word device V (special register) WV as word device Screen Editing (Memory Input) When [Split Data Area] is selected for [Trans. Mode], the [PRG No] setting is available in the [Memory Input] dialog. Range for [PRG No.]: to

186 9. Toyoda Machine Works PLC 9- Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) PLC * SHELL + +SD -SD 0V +RD 4 -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

187 Toyoda Machine Works PLC Please use this page freely.

188 0. VIGOR PLC 0-0. VIGOR PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection M series M-CPU COM PORT RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port 0 0 Parity Even Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register/special register) 0 X (input relay) Y (output relay) M (internal relay/special relay) S (internal relay/step relay) 4 T (timer/current value) C (counter/current value) 6 C (high-speed counter/current value) * TS (timer/contact) CS (counter/contact) 9 TC (timer/coil) 0 CC (counter/coil) * For numerical data format where double-words can be used (Num. Data Display, Graph, Sampling), data is processed as double-words. For those where bits or words can be used, data is processed as words consisting of lower 6 bits. For input Upper 6 bits are ignored. For output 0 is written for upper 6 bits.

189 0-0. VIGOR PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * SD RD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) RXD TXD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RTS CTS RS-4 Wiring Diagram V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) * SHELL PLC +SD RDA -SD RDB +RD 4 SDA -RD SDB * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

190 . Yamatake PLC -. Yamatake PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection MX series MX00/MX0 ASCII connector RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Port Parity Even Even Transmission code Data length Stop bit Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memory TYPE Remarks R (data register) 0 M (auxiliary relay) L (latch relay) X (input relay) Y (output relay) 4 TP (timer/current value) TS (timer/setting value) 6 CP (counter/current value) CS (counter/setting value) T (timer/contact) 9 C (counter/contact) 0 P (link register)

191 -. Yamatake PLC Wiring Wiring diagram with the PLC is shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

192 . Yaskawa Electric PLC -. Yaskawa Electric PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type PLC Unit/Port Connection Memobus GL60 series GL0 GL0 series JAMSC-IF60 JAMSC-IF6 JAMSC-IF6 JAMSC-IF6 JAMSC-IF6 RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Memobus port on the CPU module RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] JAMSC-0NOM00 RS-4 [Wiring Diagram 6] PROGIC- PORT on the CPU unit RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] CP900SH/MP900 CP900SH MP90 MP90 CP-IF RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] [Wiring Diagram 4] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Memobus port on the CPU module RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] IF RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] * Other PLCs can also be connected with Memobus. Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: Memobus Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port Parity Even Even Transmission Data length -bit RTU (fixed) code Stop bit Error check CRC (fixed) Port delay timer 0 (fixed) Select [TYPE ] or [TYPE ] for [Trans. Mode] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the V-SFT editor. PLC Model V Setting Contents GL60 series, PROGIC- TYPE Special binary code GL0/0 series TYPE Standard binary code

193 -. Yaskawa Electric PLC CP900SH/MP900 Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port Parity Even Even Transmission Data length code Stop bit Error check CRC (fixed) Port delay timer 0 (fixed) Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. Memobus Memory TYPE Remarks 4 (word device) 0 (input register) Including constant register, read only R (link register) A (extension register) 0 (coil) 4 D (link coil) (input relay) 6 Read only (constant register) CP900SH/MP900 Memory TYPE Remarks MW (holding register) 0 MB as bit device IW (input register) IB as bit device, read only MB (coil) 4 MW as word device IB (input relay) 6 IW as word device, read only When setting the MB/IB memory, set the bit numbers in the hexadecimal notation. MBxxxx DEC Bit No.: HEX

194 . Yaskawa Electric PLC - Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD TXD RD RXD RS 4 RTS 4 CS CTS DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. ND DTR 9 Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD TXD RD RXD RS 4 RTS 4 CS CTS DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. GND DTR 9

195 -4. Yaskawa Electric PLC Wiring Diagram * SD V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) CPIF(CN) IF(CN/) D-sub 9-pin (male) SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS DR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. ER 9 Wiring Diagram 4 * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) CPIF (CN) D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS DSR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. CD

196 . Yaskawa Electric PLC - RS-4 Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) TXD+ +SD RXD+ -SD RXD 6 +RD 4 -RD TXD 9 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram 6 V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN * SHELL D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) TXD+ +SD RXD+ -SD RXDRT 4 +RD 4 RXD 6 -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. TXRD TXD 9

197 -6. Yaskawa Electric PLC Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) CPIF (CN) MR- (male) +SD RX -SD RX+ +RD 4 TX 6 -RD TX+ * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Wiring Diagram V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) IF (CN) MR- (male) * SHELL RX RX+ +SD RXR+ 4 -SD TRX+ +RD 4 TX 6 -RD TX+ * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

198 . Yokogawa Electric PLC -. Yokogawa Electric PLC Available PLCs Select PLC Type CPU Unit/Port Connection PLCWay LC0-0N RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] Ladder Transfer *4 FA00 FA00 LC0-0N RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Programming tool port on the CPU module * Yokogawa s ladder transfer cable KM-N * FA-M FA-MR FA-M FA-M R FLC0-N * RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] FLC-N FLC-N RS-4 [Wiring Diagram ] Programming tool port on the CPU module * Yokogawa s ladder transfer cable KM-N * FLC-F RS-C [Wiring Diagram ] * The CPUs that can be connected directly to the programming tool port on the CPU module are FSP-0N, FSP-N, FSP-N, FSP-N, FSP-6N, FSP-4H and FSP-6H. * For connection to MJ of a V06, use an MJ-PLC adaptor plus KM-N. * When the link unit FLC0-N is used, the communication setting and available memory are the same as those for FA-00. However, B (common register) cannot be used. *4 For the ladder transfer function, refer to Appendix Ladder Transfer Function.

199 -. Yokogawa Electric PLC Communication Setting The recommended communication parameter settings of the PLC and the V series are as follows: FA00 Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port Parity Even Even Transmission Data length code Stop bit Sumcheck Provided (fixed) Terminal character None (fixed) Protection function None (fixed) FA-M/FA-MR Item Setting on PLC V Comm. Parameter Setting Baud rate 900 bps 900 bps Port Parity Even Even Transmission Data length* code Stop bit Sumcheck Provided Provided Terminal character None (fixed) Protection function None (fixed) * When directing connecting to the programming tool port on the CPU module, the data length is fixed to. Select [-bit] for [Data Length] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog of the V series. Also, set CPU Communication Port of Configuration in the ladder creation tool as below. Personal computer link function: Use * The maximum baud rate available with the V series is 00 bps. Select the appropriate baud rate depending on the used PLC and environment.

200 . Yokogawa Electric PLC - Available Memory The available memory setting range varies depending on the PLC model. Be sure to set within the range available with the PLC to be used. Use [TYPE] when assigning the indirect memory for macro programs. FA00 Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 B (common register) TP (timer/current value) TS (timer/set value) CP (counter/current value) 4 CS (counter/set value) X (input relay) 6 Y (output relay) I (internal relay) E (external relay) 9 FA-M/FA-MR Memory TYPE Remarks D (data register) 0 R (common register) V (index register) W (link register) Z (special register) 4 TP (down timer current value) TS (timer set value) 6 Read only CP (down counter current value) CS (down counter set value) X (input relay) 9 Y (output relay) 0 I (internal relay) E (common relay) L (link relay) M (special relay) 4 B (file register) * The CPU number is required in addition to the memory type and address. The assigned memory is indicated when editing the screen as shown on the right. Example: : D0000 Address Memory type CPU number

201 -4. Yokogawa Electric PLC Wiring Wiring diagrams with the PLC are shown below. RS-C Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub -pin (male) SD SD RD RD RS 4 RS 4 CS CS DR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. ER 0 Wiring Diagram * V06 MJ RJ-4 -pin SHELL V Series CN D-sub -pin (male) PLC D-sub 9-pin (male) SD RD RD SD RS 4 ER 4 CS DR 6 * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RS CS

202 . Yokogawa Electric PLC - RS-4 Wiring Diagram * V06 V Series MJ CN RJ-4 -pin D-sub -pin (male) SHELL PLC RDB +SD RDA -SD SDB +RD 4 SDA -RD * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Use shielded twist-pair cables.

203 -6. Yokogawa Electric PLC Please use this page freely.

204 Appendix Appendix PLCWay Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) Appendix Appendix 4 Appendix Appendix 6 Appendix Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link) : n Connection (Multi-drop) Ethernet Universal Serial Communications V-Link Ladder Transfer Function

205

206 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F Appendix PLCWay App- Appendix PLCWay PLCWay The PLCWay function is an original network function where one V series can be connected to two PLCs. Even if the manufacturers of these PLCs are not the same, they can be connected to one V series. When the V series or a V06 equipped with DU-0 is used, connect the first PLC to the CN connector. When a V06 is used, connect the first PLC to MJ. Connect the second PLC to the MJ port (to MJ when a V06 is used). V series or V06 + DU-0 RS-C RS-4/RS-4 V series CN MJ/ PLC (MITSUBISHI) RS-C RS-4/RS-4 (-wire connection) (Yokogawa) V06 RS-C RS-4/RS-4 PLC (MITSUBISHI) V06 MJ MJ RS-C RS-4/RS-4 (-wire connection) PLC (Yokogawa)

207 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F App- Appendix PLCWay With the PLCWay function, it is possible to communicate with PLCs without special program in the same way as : connection. Two PLCs that are connected to the V series are controlled at the same time, and memory read/write operations are available with these two PLCs. When the PLCWay function is used, connection at the MJ port is possible via RS-C or RS-4 (-wire connection). With RS-C, one PLC can be connected; with RS-4, a maximum of PLCs can be connected. RS-C RS-4/RS-4 V series CN MJ/ PLC RS-4/RS-4 (-wire connection) PLC PLC PLCn (n = ~ to ) Constant reading/sampling of PLC data connected to the PLCWay When read/write memory addresses are preset on the temperature control network/plcway table, background data transfering is performed at regular intervals. It is also possible to save the read data in the V internal buffer, SRAM or CF card. Data transfer between PLCs The PLC memory data can be transferred to another PLC in blocks using a macro command. For the description of : connection, refer to Chapter. Hereunder the PLC connection at the MJ port and settings required for PLCWay connection are described. Limitations on Connection at PLCWay There are some limitations on the connection at the MJ port.. It is not possible to make a selection for text processing in the communication parameter setting. Text processing: Fixed to [LSB MSB].. Even if a communication error occurs, it is not possible to stop communications. Error codes are stored in $s0 to 6 for each station.. For V series, connections using both the PLCWay and multi-link functions are possible at the same time when the system program is version.00 or later and the V-SFT editor is version.0..0 or later.

208 Appendix PLCWay App- PLCs Compatible with PLCWay Connection at MJ Port When connecting the V series to the PLC at the MJ port using PLCWay function, use the RS-C or RS-4 (RS-4) -wire connection. The PLC that allows RS-4 (RS-4) (4-wire) connection only cannot be connected directly. PLCs compatible with PLCWay connection at MJ port as of January, 00 are shown below. Manufacturer Applicable PLCs See: Fuji Electric page - Hitachi page 0- Matsushita Electric Works page - MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC For the applicable PLCs, refer to PLCWay under Available PLCs in Chapter to Chapter. ( : Connectable : Not connectable) page 6- OMRON page 9- SHARP page - Toyoda Machine Works Yokogawa Electric page 9- page - For the applicable PLCs, refer to PLCWay under Available PLCs in Chapter to Chapter. ( : Connectable : Not connectable) The communication parameter setting and available memory for the PLC connected at the MJ port for PLCWay connection are the same as those for : connection. Refer to the communication setting and the available memory for each manufacturer in Chapter to Chapter.

209 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F App-4 Appendix PLCWay Wiring Two kinds of cables are available for PLCWay connection at the MJ port. Cable connections are explained. Connecting Method (Using MJ-D) To connect the PLC and the V series at the MJ port, use Hakko Electronics MJ to D-sub conversion cable MJ-D (0. m, metric thread) and the cable for : connection at CN. For more information on the cable for : connection at CN, refer to Wiring in Chapter to Chapter. This combination of cables (MJ-D + : connection cable) can be used either for RS-C or RS-4 (RS-4) -wire connection. V series MJ/ MJ-D : connection cable (RS-C, RS-4/RS-4) With RS-4 (-wire connection), a maximum of PLCs can be connected. For information on connection between PLCs, refer to the instruction manual for the PLC. Connecting Method (Using V6-TMP) Use Hakko Electronics cable V6-TMP ( m) when connecting the V series to a PLC at the MJ port. The shielded cable of V6-TMP is connected to FG (frame ground) when the V series is used and to (signal ground) when the V06 is used. * Notes on Use of V6-TMP There are six wires in the V6-TMP cable as shown on the right. The wires to be used are determined depending on the connecting method. For the wires not used, be sure to properly insulate with tape, etc. V6-TMP Black : Green : Brown : 4 Red : Orange : Yellow : <RS-C Connection> Connection example with MITSUBISHI ASJUC4-R Modular jack, -pin PLC * SD CD RD RD SD * V6-TMP is connected to FG when the V series is used and to when the V06 is used. DR RS 6 * Use shielded cables. CS

210 Appendix PLCWay App- <RS-4 Connection> Connection example with Mitsubishi ASJUC4-R4 ( set) Modular jack, -pin * +SD/RD SD/RD PLC SDA SDB RDA * V6-TMP is connected to FG when the V series is used and to when the V06 is used. * Use shielded cables. RDB Connection example with Mitsubishi ASJUC4-R4 ( sets) Modular jack, -pin * V6-TMP PLC FG PLC FG PLC FG +SD/RD SDA SDA SDA SD/RD SDB SDB SDB Terminating resistance (ON) RDA RDB RDA RDB RDA RDB * V6-TMP is connected to FG when the V series is used and to when the V06 is used. * Use shielded cables. Terminating resistance (ON) * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Terminating resistance (OFF) * Use shielded twist-pair cables. Terminating resistance (ON) Terminating Resistance Setting For V Series: The terminating resistance should be set on the DIP switch in the backside of the unit. When MJ is used: Set DIPSW6 to the ON position. When MJ is used: Set DIPSW to the ON position. ON 4 6 CF auto load Not used MJ (modular jack ) terminating resistance CN RD terminating resistance at pins 4 and MJ (modular jack ) terminating resistance CN SD terminating resistance at pins and

211 App-6 Appendix PLCWay For V06: The terminating resistance should be set on the DIP switch in the side of the unit. Set DIPSW to the ON position. Side View MJ (modular jack ) terminating resistance for RS-4 MJ (modular jack ) SD terminating resistance for RS-4 MJ (modular jack ) RD terminating resistance for RS-4 CF auto load (for USB/DU-0) 4 ON (Enlarged view) V-SFT Setting PLC model selection and parameter setting to be made on the V-SFT editor for the PLCWay connection at the MJ port are explained. Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Setting Select the PLC model and make the parameter setting as described below.. Select [System Setting] [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Setting] [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Comm. Setting]. The [Temp. Control/PLCWay Comm. Setting] dialog is displayed.. Check [Use Temp. Control Network/PLCWay Communication].

212 Appendix PLCWay App-. Select the MJ port. ) Click the [Refer to modular] button. The [Modular Jack] dialog is displayed. ) Select [Temp./PLCWay] for modular jack or that is used for PLCWay communication. 4. Select the PLC model to be connected at the MJ port. ) Click the [Setting] button. The [Type Setting] dialog is displayed. ) Select [PLCWay]. The PLC manufacturer names who support PLCWay communication are displayed. ) Click [+]. The available model names of the selected manufacturer are displayed. 4) Select the PLC model name and click [OK]. The message communication Communication parameters are reset. OK? is displayed. ) Click [Yes].. Set the parameters for the PLC to be connected at the MJ port.

213 App- Appendix PLCWay [Baud Rate] (400, 9600, 900, 400, 600, 000, k, bps) Select the communication speed with the PLC connected at the MJ port. [Parity] (None/Odd/Even) Select the parity setting for communications with the PLC connected at the MJ port. [ Level] (RS-C/RS-4) Select the signal level for communications with the PLC connected at the MJ port. [Data Length] (-bit/-bit) Select the data length for communications with the PLC connected at the MJ port. [Stop Bit] (-bit/-bit) Select the stop bit setting for communications with the PLC connected at the MJ port. [Retrials] Set the number of retrials to be attempted in the case that a communication error occurs. [Time-out Time] ( 00 msec) Select the receive time of the response from the PLC connected at the MJ port. If no response is received within the specified time, a retrial is attempted. [Send Delay Time] ( msec) Set a time delay in sending the response to the PLC after receipt of data from the PLC connected at the MJ port. [Return Time] ( 0 sec) When the PLC in the PLCWay communication is turned off, data read from the PLC is temporarily prohibited. An inquiry for restoration is sent each time the specified return time has elapsed. [Code] (DEC/BCD) Choose the code for entering numerical data into the PLC in the PLCWay communication. For numerical data, such as those for data displays or data sampling in the sampling mode, BCD or DEC should be chosen for [Input Type]. The following options may be set depending on the PLC model. - MITSUBISHI: A series Link, FX series Link (A Protocol) [Trans. Mode] (Trans. Mode /Trans. Mode 4) Trans. Mode : Without CR/LF Trans. Mode 4: With CR/LF - OMRON: SYSMAC C, SYSMAC CV, SYSMAC CS [Trans. Mode] (Trans. Mode /Trans. Mode ) Trans. Mode : Standard (BCD without signs) Trans. Mode : Special BCD (BCD with sign) - Yokogawa: FA-M, FAMR [Trans. Mode] (with sum check/without sum check) 6. To reset the setting, click the [Default] button, or set the desired value. Text Processing For the PLC connected at the MJ port, text processing cannot be set in the [Temp. Control/PLCWay Comm. Setting] dialog. Text processing For processing characters, the arrangement of the st and nd bytes in one word is fixed as LSB MSB as shown on the right. 0 [LSB MSB] MSB LSB nd byte st byte

214 Appendix PLCWay App-9 PLC Memory Setting Setting the PLC memory (PLC memory) connected at the MJ port. Open the [Memory Input] dialog for the part.. For the PLC memory connected at the MJ port, select [PLC Memory] for [Type] and specify the memory address.. Set the port number of the PLC. Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table The following operations are available when the temperature control network/plcway table is used. Reading the PLC Memory (page App-) Writing into PLC Memory (V series only) (page App-) Sampling from the PLC Memory (page App-) Transferring Data in the PLC Memory (page App-) Starting. Click [System Setting] [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Setting] [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Network Table]. * [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Network Table] becomes active only when the setting in the [Temp. Control/PLCway Comm. Setting] dialog has been completed as described in the previous section.. Set the temperature control network/plcway table number (0 to ) and click [OK].. The [Temp. Network/PLCWay Table Edit] window is opened.

215 App-0 Appendix PLCWay There are tables of temperature control network/plcway table No. 0 to. A maximum of addresses of the PLC memory can be set. Closing Click [Close] in the drop-down menu, or click the [Close] button at the top right corner. Comment Setting There are temperature control network/plcway tables and a comment can be set for each table.. Click [Edit] [Comment]. The [Comment Setting] dialog is displayed.. Enter the desired comment and click [OK]. The entered comment is displayed at the top right corner.

216 Appendix PLCWay App- Setting Data in the Table. Click on a line in the table. The selected line turns blue. Click.. Double-clicking brings up the default setting for the PLC memory, data type, etc. Click. Click. Double-click. Memory input Data code Temperature control network/plcway table setting ) [Memory Input] dialog Set the PLC memory. ) Data code [Word] Data in the PLC memory is handled as numerical data of one word. Data is converted to the numerical data code of the target memory address and transferred to the address. [Double Word] Data in the PLC memory is handled as numerical data of two words. Data is converted to the numerical data code of the target memory address and transferred to the address. [Bit] Data in the PLC memory is handled as bit information of one word. Data is transferred to the target memory address without conversion.

217 App- Appendix PLCWay [Dummy Word] [Dummy Double] The memory addresses for [PLC Memory] and [Internal Memory] are automatically allocated consecutively in the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Table Setting] dialog. If you would like to skip any memory address, keep the cell in the [Temp. CTRL/PLC Mem.] column blank (no setting). It is regarded as a dummy word or double-word. - For reading: 0 is always stored in the target memory address. The memory is not usable for any other purposes. - For writing: The memory is usable for other purposes. <Example: [Word] [Bit]> Data transfer using the temperature control network/plcway table is based on the [Code] settings in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog and the [Temp. Control/PLCWay Comm. Setting] dialog plus the [Data Type] setting in the [Temp. Network/PLCWay Table Edit] window. Within the V series, data is normally handled as DEC with signs. [Word] [Double Word] Periodical reading Temperature control/plc memory V series internal memory Code Temperature control/plcway communication setting BCD MSB LSB MSB LSB DEC Bit PLC memory Communication parameter setting DEC Communication parameter setting BCD MSB LSB MSB LSB [Bit] Code Bit Periodical reading Temperature control/plc memory V series internal memory Temperature control/plcway communication setting BCD DEC MSB LSB PLC memory Communication parameter setting DEC BCD ) [Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table Setting] dialog In this dialog, set the use of each table. TEMP_READ, TEMP_WRITE Periodical Reading Synchronized Reading Periodical Writing Synchronized Writing

218 FACTORY PROGRAMMER Appendix PLCWay App- Reading the PLC Memory It is possible to read data from the PLC memory registered in the temperature control network/plcway table into the PLC memory (or the V series internal memory). Reading can occur at regular intervals ([Periodical Reading]) or at the time of bit setting ([Synchronized Reading]). Periodical Reading Data is read from the PLC memory into the PLC memory (or the V series internal memory) at regular intervals as set in the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Table Setting] dialog. Data SYSTEM F F F PLC PLC F4 F F6 ACE MJ F CN POWER PLC memory D00 D0 Temp. Network/PLCWay tables Table No. 0 Temp. CTRL/PLC Mem. D00 D0 PLC Memory D00 D0 PLC Memory D00 D0 0 0 Read cycle sec. seconds later, data is read from the PLC memory set in table No. 0. PLC memory PLC Memory D00 D0 D00 D0 seconds later, data is read from the PLC memory set in table No. 0. PLC memory PLC Memory D00 D0 0 D00 D0 0

219 App-4 Appendix PLCWay Setting Items Setting items necessary for periodical reading Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table (page App-9) Temperature control network/plcway table setting Disabled when [Periodical Reading] is selected. [Periodical Reading] Select [Periodical Reading]. The following setting items become active. [Read Cycle] (sec) Set the cycle of reading data in the PLC memory. Read Cycle [High Speed Reading] Setting Range Unit Unchecked s Checked ms [ PLC Memory] When storing data read from the PLC memory into the PLC memory, check this box and set the desired top memory address. [ Internal Memory] When storing data read from the PLC memory into the V series internal memory, check this box and set the desired top memory address. [Control Memory] This option is disabled when [Use Periodical Reading] is selected. [Temp./PLCWay Comm. Setting] Clicking this button brings up the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Comm. Setting] dialog and allows you to review the setting.

220 FACTORY PROGRAMMER Appendix PLCWay App- Synchronized Reading (V series only) It is possible to read from the temperature control network/plcway table memory into the PLC memory (V series internal memory) at the leading edge (0 ) of a control memory bit. Data SYSTEM F F F PLC PLC F4 F F6 ACE MJ F CN POWER PLC memory Temp. Network/PLCWay tables PLC Memory D00 D0 Table No. 0 Temp. CTRL/PLC Mem. D00 D0 Control Memory PLC Memory D00 D0 D00 D00 D0 Control Memory D00 D0 D0 D0 0 0 Table No. 0 control memory bit ON PLC Memory D00 D0 0 0 Control Memory D00 D0 D0 D0 Reading the table No. 0 PLC memory and setting (ON) the confirmation memory bit PLC Memory D00 D0 Control Memory D00 D0 D0 D0

221 App-6 Appendix PLCWay Setting Items Setting items necessary for synchronized reading Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table (page App-9) Temperature control network/plcway table setting [Synchronized Reading] Select [Synchronized Reading]. The following setting items become active. [ PLC Memory] When storing data read from the PLC memory into the PLC memory, check this box and set the desired top memory address. [ Internal Memory] When storing data read from the PLC memory into the V series internal memory, check this box and set the desired top memory address. [Control Memory] Select the memory address as a trigger for reading the temperature control network/plcway memory. The specified memory address is used for temperature control network/plcway table Nos. 0 to. For more information, refer to Control Memory (page App-). [Temp./PLCWay Comm. Setting] Clicking this button brings up the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Comm. Setting] dialog and allows you to review the setting.

222 FACTORY PROGRAMMER Appendix PLCWay App- Writing into PLC Memory (V series only) It is possible to write data from the PLC memory or the V series internal memory into the PLC memory registered in the temperature control network/plcway table. Writing can occur at regular intervals ([Periodical Writing]) or at the time of bit setting ([Synchronized Writing]). Periodical Writing Data is written from the PLC memory (V series internal memory) into theplc memory at regular intervals as set in the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Table Setting] dialog. Data SYSTEM F F F PLC PLC F4 F F6 ACE MJ F CN POWER PLC memory D00 D0 Temp. Network/PLCWay tables Table No. 0 Temp. CTRL/PLC Mem. D00 D0 PLC Memory D00 D0 PLC Memory D00 D0 0 0 Write cycle sec. PLC memory D00 D0 seconds later, data is written from the PLC memory into the PLC set in table No. 0. PLC Memory D00 D0 PLC memory D00 D0 seconds later, data is written from the PLC memory into the PLC set in table No. 0. PLC Memory D00 D0

223 App- Appendix PLCWay Setting Items Setting items necessary for periodical writing Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table (page App-9) Temperature control network/plcway table setting Disabled when [Periodical Writing] is selected. [Periodical Writing] Select [Periodical Writing]. The following setting items become active. [Write Cycle] (sec) Set the cycle of writing data in the PLC memory. Read Cycle [High Speed Reading] Setting Range Unit Unchecked s Checked ms [ PLC Memory] Check this item when writing data from the PLC memory into the PLC memory. Enter the desired top memory address. [ Internal Memory] Check this item when writing data from the internal memory into theplc memory. Enter the desired top memory address. [Control Memory] This option is disabled when [Periodical Writing] is selected. [Temp./PLCWay Comm. Setting] Clicking this button brings up the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Comm. Setting] dialog and allows you to review the setting.

224 FACTORY PROGRAMMER Appendix PLCWay App-9 Synchronized Writing (V series only) Data is written from the PLC memory (V series internal memory) into the PLC memory set in the temperature control network/plcway table at the leading edge (0 ) of the control memory bit. Data SYSTEM F F F PLC PLC F4 F F6 ACE MJ F CN POWER PLC memory Temp. Network/PLCWay tables PLC Memory D00 D0 Table No. 0 Temp. CTRL/PLC Mem. D00 D0 Control Memory PLC Memory D00 D00 D0 D00 D0 Control Memory D00 D0 D0 D Table No. 0 control memory bit ON PLC Memory D00 D D00 D0 D0 D0 PLC memory D00 D Data is written from the PLC memory into the PLC memory set in table No. 0. The confirmation memory bit is set (ON). PLC Memory D00 D0 D00 D0 D0 D

225 App-0 Appendix PLCWay Setting Items Items that must be set to perform synchronized writing Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table (page App-9) Temperature control network/plcway table setting [Synchronized Writing] Select [Synchronized Writing]. The following setting items become active. [ PLC Memory] Check this item when writing data from the PLC memory into the PLC memory. Enter the desired top memory address. [ Internal Memory] Check this item when writing data from the internal memory into theplc memory. Enter the desired top memory address. [Control Memory] Enter a memory address as the trigger for writing from the PLC memory (or the V series internal memory). The specified memory address is used for temperature control network/plcway table Nos. 0 to. For more information, refer to Control Memory (page App-). [Temp./PLCWay Comm. Setting] Clicking this button brings up the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Comm. Setting] dialog and allows you to review the setting.

226 Appendix PLCWay App- Control Memory Control memory becomes effective for executing synchronized reading/synchronized writing. Consecutive four words starting from control memory n are allocated. Control memory n Contents Memory Type n n + n + Read/Write command memory V n + Read/Write confirmation memory V [Read/Write command memory] (control memory n and n + ) One bit is allocated to each table. At the leading edge (0 ) of a bit, reading from or writing to memory set in the corresponding temperature control network/plcway table occurs. n Bit number Temperature control network/plcway table Nos. 0 - n Bit number Temperature control network/plcway table Nos. 6 - [Read/Write confirmation memory] (control memory n + and n + ) One bit is allocated to each table. When a bit of the control memory n or n + is set (ON), the confirmation memory bit for the corresponding table number is set (0 ). When a bit of the control memory n or n + is reset (OFF), the confirmation memory bit for the corresponding table number is reset ( 0). n Bit number Temperature control network/plcway table Nos. 0 - n Bit number Temperature control network/plcway table Nos. 6 - * Confirmation memory bit ON (0 ) timing When the bit of the command memory is set (0 ) and the resulting reading or writing is complete, the bit of the confirmation memory is set (ON).

227 App- Appendix PLCWay Sampling from the PLC Memory It is possible to sample data in the PLC memory at regular intervals. Setting Items Setting necessary for constant sampling Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table (page App-9) Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table Setting Buffering area setting Trend sampling or data sampling Memory card setting (when [SRAM] or [CF Card] is selected for [Store Target] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog) Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table Setting Disabled when [Periodical Reading] is selected. [Periodical Reading] Select [Periodical Reading]. The following setting items become active. [Read Cycle] (sec) Set the cycle of reading data in the PLC memory. Read Cycle [High Speed Reading] Setting Range Unit Unchecked s Checked ms [ PLC Memory] [ Internal Memory] Do not check these boxes. Since sampling data is stored in the internal buffer, SRAM or CF card, it is not necessary to set these items. [Control Memory] This option is disabled when [Use Periodical Reading] is selected. [Temp./PLCWay Comm. Setting] Clicking this button brings up the [Temp./PLCWay Comm. Setting] dialog and allows you to review the setting.

228 Appendix PLCWay App- Buffering Area Setting Click [System Setting] [Buffering Area Setting]. The [Buffering Area Setting] dialog is opened. [Sampling Method] Temp. Control Net/PLC [No. of Table] Select the temperature control network/plcway table number for sampling. [No. of Samples] Specify the number of sampling times. [Output File No.] This item becomes active when [SRAM] or [CF Card] is selected for [Store Target]. [Store Target] (Internal Buffer/SRAM/CF Card) Choose the desired medium for storing sampling data. - Internal Buffer: Stores data in the internal buffer of the V series. (RAM) - SRAM: Stores data in the SRAM area. V series: SRAM mounted on the unit, VEM-S, REC-MCARD SRAM, V06EM-S V6 series: V6EM/RS, V6EM/RSi, REC-MCARD SRAM - CF Card: Stores data in the CF card. (V series, V60CH) [Full Processing] (Continuous/Stop) Choose the desired processing when the target medium space has been used up. - Continuous: When [No. of Samples] has been exceeded, data from the oldest is discarded. - Stop: When [No. of Samples] has been exceeded, sampling is stopped. Calculating the buffering area capacity When [Internal Buffer] is selected for [Store Target] in the [Buffering Area Setting], the maximum available capacity is k words. When [Temp Control Net/PLC] is selected for [Sampling Method], the required capacity can be calculated as shown below. sample = [Words*] + words Buffer size = [No. of Samples] sample * [Words] here means the number of words in the memory addresses used in the temperature control network/plcway table that is set for [No. of Table].

229 App-4 Appendix PLCWay Trend Sampling or Data Sampling Setting To show data stored in the specified buffer number, trend sampling or data sampling must be set. Click the [Trend Sampling] or [Data Sampling] icon and make the setting. For more information, refer to the Reference Manual (Function). Trend sampling Data sampling Memory Card Setting When [SRAM] or [CF Card] is selected for [Store Target] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog, the memory card setting is required. * The used memory capacity of SRAM and CF card can be calculated in the same way as the buffering area.. Click [System Setting] [Memory Card Setting]. The [Memory Card] dialog is opened.. Select [Buffering File] for [Type].. Match the file number (tab) in the [Memory Card] dialog with [Output File No.] in the [Buffering Area Setting] dialog. Select the tab of the same number.

230 Appendix PLCWay App- Transferring Data in the PLC Memory Data in the PLC memory can be transferred to the PLC memory, V series internal memory or a memory card at one time according to the temperature control network/plcway table. Conversely, it is also possible to transfer data in the PLC memory, V internal memory or a memory card to the PLC memory at one time. To transfer data at one time, use a macro command (TEMP_READ/ TEMP_WRITE). Setting Items Setting necessary for trasferring PLC memory Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table (page App-9) Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table Setting Macro (TEMP_READ/TEMP_WRITE) Memory card setting (when a memory card is used) Temperature Control Network/PLCWay Table Setting Disable when [TEMP_READ/WRITE] is selected. [TEMP_READ/WRITE] Select [TEMP_READ/WRITE]. Macro [TEMP_READ] Data in the PLC memory addresses set in the temperature control network/plcway table specified for F is transferred to the memory addresses starting from F0. Usable Devices PLC Memory Internal Memory Constant (Temperature Control Table No.) Memory Card Indirect Designation F0 F TEMP_READ: Temperature control network table read TEMP_READ F0 <- TABLE : F

231 App-6 Appendix PLCWay [TEMP_WRITE] Data in memory addresses starting from F is transferred to the PLC memory of the temperature control network/plcway table specified for F0. Usable Devices PLC Memory Internal Memory Constant (Temperature Control Table No.) Memory Card Indirect Designation F0 F TEMP_WRITE: Temperature control network table write TEMP_WRITE TABLE : F0 <- F Memory Card Setting The memory card setting should be made when the memory card is used as the source or target memory for a macro command.. Click [System Setting] [Memory Card Setting]. The [Memory Card] dialog is opened.. Select [Data File] for [Type]. Check [Use Temp. Control Net/PLCWay].. Click the [Table No.] button and select the table number to be used. The appropriate number is automatically set for [No. of Data].

232 Appendix PLCWay App- Indirect Memory Designation It is possible to have access to the PLC memory using the indirect memory designation as a macro command. In this section, the indirect designation of the PLC memory is explained. The internal user memory ($u) is used for the indirect memory designation. Designating the indirect memory PLC memory <0 to 6> 0 n + 0 Model (0) Memory type n + Memory number (address) n + 00 Bit designation n+ 00 Port <66 and above> 0 n + 0 Model () Memory type n + Memory number (address) upper n + Memory number (address) lower n + 00 Bit designation n Port number - Memory type Depends on the PLC model. Refer to Available Memory in Chapter to Chapter when setting. - Port number Set the port number of the PLC connected at the MJ port. User Log Read for Yokogawa s PLC Macro The user log set with Yokogawa s PLC FA-M/FA-MR connected at the MJ port can be read using the macro command TEMP_CTL. [TEMP_CTL] This macro command controls the operation set in the memory addresses starting from the one specified for F0 for the number of words specified for F. Usable Devices F0 F PLC Memory Internal Memory Constant (Words) Memory Card Indirect Designation User log registration number read Latest user log read n th user log read TEMP_CTL: Temperature controller/plcway control function TEMP_CTL F0 F F0 (= $u n) F n n+ n+ n+ n+4 n+ n+6 n+ n+ n+9 n+0 n+ Words Port number Port number Port number CPU No. * (0 to ) CPU No. * (0 to ) CPU No. * (0 to ) Command Command 0 Command to 6 Registration number * Header 0: Normal : Error * Header 0: Normal : Error * Year Month Day Hour Minute Second (ASCII) Year Month Day Hour Minute Second (ASCII) Return data: Data stored from PLCWay to V series * Set 0 for CPU No.. * The registration number is stored in special register Z0. * If there is no user log in the n + memory or there is an error in communications, [ ] is stored. Main code Main code (DEC) (DEC) Sub code Sub code

233 App- Appendix PLCWay Processing Cycle The processing cycle on the V series with the PLCWay function is explained.. When the temperature control network/plcway table is not used: PLC data PLC data PLC data PLC data PLC data n PLC data n cycle Fig.. When the temperature control network/plcway table is used: PLC data PLC data PLC data PLC data n screen data read cycle PLC data PLC data PLC data n data read cycle from the PLC connected at the MJ port Fig. When the temperature control network/plcway table is not used (Fig. ), the V series does not communicate with the PLC while it is communicating with the PLC. When the temperature control network/plcway table is used (Fig. ), the V series communicates with the PLC and the PLC at the same time. As a result, the V series can communicate with the PLC without reducing the processing capacity for communication with the PLC. When the temperature control network/plcway table is used: If periodical reading/writing or synchronized reading/writing based on the temperature control network/plcway table takes place while the V series is accessing the PLC memory via a macro command, the progress of the macro execution may be delayed. To avoid this, it is possible to temporarily stop reading from/writing into the PLC memory using the system memory addresses ($s6 and 64). For more information, refer to page App-.

234 Appendix PLCWay App-9 Notes on Screen Data Transfer Temperature Control/PLC Program When using the temperature control network/plcway communications, it is necessary to transfer the temperature control/plc program to the V series. When the temperature control network/plcway setting has been made, the program is automatically transferred to the V series together with screen data. When [ Temp./PLC] is selected in the [Transfer] dialog, only the temperature control/plc program can be transferred to the V series. When the Main Menu screen is displayed after transferring screen data, the [Extension] switch appears. If the [Extension] switch does not appear, transfer font data. Pressing the switch brings up the Extension Program Info. screen where the temperature control/plcway driver setting and temperature control network/plcway setting can be reviewed. For details, refer to Chapter 6, MONITOUCH Operations in the separate Hardware Specifications for the V series or V06.

235 App-0 Appendix PLCWay System Memory The status of the PLC connected at the MJ port for PLCWay communications is output to the system memory ($s) of the V series. The memory addresses ($s9 to 64) of the PLC connected at the MJ port are explained. List Address Contents $s9 TEMP_READ/TEMP_WRITE/TEMP_CTL macro execution result 0 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 00 status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 0 status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 0 status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 0 status 4 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 04 status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 0 status 6 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 06 status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 0 status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 0 status 9 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 09 status 40 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 0 status 4 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 4 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 4 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 44 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 4 status 4 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 46 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 6 status 4 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 4 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 49 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 9 status 0 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 0 status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 4 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 4 status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 6 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 6 status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 9 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 9 status 60 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. 0 status 6 Temperature controller/plcway Station No. status 6 Other than 0 : Periodical/synchronized reading suspended 6 Other than 0 : Temperature control network/plcway transfer macro forced execution 64 Other than 0 : Periodical/synchronized writing suspended

236 Appendix PLCWay App- Details $s9 An execution result of macro command TEMP_READ, TEMP_WRITE, or TEMP_CTL is stored at this address. - [0]: A command has been executed successfully. - [Other than 0 ]: A command execution has resulted in an error. $s0-6 The following status code for the PLC connected at the MJ port is stored. Code 0000H FFFFH 00H 00H 00BH Contents Normal Timeout Check code error Data error Error code received from the PLC connected at the MJ port Errors other than the above are stored as shown below. MSB Buffer-full error Parity error Overrun error Framing error Break detection Error 0: Bits 0 to 4 are all 0. : Any bit 0 to 4 is not 0. LSB Timeout Error Details Solution Although a request to send is given to the PLC connected at the MJ port, no answer is returned within the specified time. Check,, described below. Check code error The check code in the PLC connected at the MJ port response was not correct. Check, described below. Data error The code of the received data is invalid. Check,, described below. Error code received An error occurs at the PLC connected at the MJ port. Refer to the instruction manual for the PLC. Buffer full The V buffer is full. Contact your local distributor. Parity An error occurred in parity check. Check, described below. Overrun After one character is received, the next character is received before internal processing is completed. Check, described below. Framing Although the stop bit must be [], it is detected as [0]. Check,, described below. Break detection SD (TXD) of the PLC connected at the MJ port remains at the low level. Examine the connection between SD (TXD) of the PLC connected at the MJ port and RD (RXD) of the V series. Solution. Check the parameter setting of the PLC connected at the MJ port and the setting in the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Comm. Setting] dialog.. Check the cable connection.. Data may be disrupted because of noise. Fix noise. * If you still cannot solve the error even after following the suggestions above, contact your local distributor.

237 App- Appendix PLCWay $s6 Periodical or synchronized reading set in the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Table Setting] dialog is suspended. - [0]: Periodical/synchronized reading is performed. - [Other than 0 ]: Periodical/synchronized reading is suspended. Example: Periodical reading If periodical reading of the temperature control network/plcway table is performed while the PLC memory is being accessed using a macro command, the macro execution will be delayed (Fig. a). To avoid this, periodical reading can be suspended using memory address $s6 (Fig. b). (Fig. a) Execution of macro a TEMP_READ TEMP_WRITE TEMP_CTL MOV, BMOV, BSET, BCLR, BINV When the PLC memory is used for the above command: Execution of macro a V communication cycle T T+t Temperature control network/ PLCWay table periodical reading t TEMP_CTL $u00 TEMP_CTL $u0 TEMP_CTL $u0 TEMP_CTL $u00 TEMP_CTL $u0 TEMP_CTL $u0 Temperature control network/plcway table periodical reading TEMP_CTL $u00 TEMP_CTL $u00 (Fig. b) Execution of macro b Execution of macro b V communication cycle T T Temperature control network/ PLCWay table periodical reading t $s6= TEMP_CTL $u00 TEMP_CTL $u0 TEMP_CTL $u0 $s6= TEMP_CTL $u00 TEMP_CTL $u0 TEMP_CTL $u0 Temperature control network/plcway table periodical reading TEMP_CTL $u00 $s6=0 TEMP_CTL $u00 $s6=0 $s6 Forced execution of macro commands [TEMP_READ] and [TEMP_WRITE] using the temperature control network/plcway table - [0]: When any station that has failed is included in the specified table, the macro command is not executed. - [Other than 0 ]: The macro command is forcibly executed to the stations that are working properly.

238 Appendix PLCWay App- $s64 Periodical or synchronized writing set in the [Temp. CTRL/PLCWay Table Setting] dialog is suspended. - [0]: Periodical/synchronized writing is performed. - [Other than 0 ]: Periodical/synchronized writing is suspended. For the example of the use of the address, refer to $s6 on page $s6 (page App-).

239 App-4 Appendix PLCWay Please use this page freely.

240 RUN STOP Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) App- Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) Multi-link One PLC is connected to a maximum of four V series. An original network is created where the V series (Local Port ) that is directly connected to the PLC is the master station, and other three V series are slave stations. Only the master station makes communications directly with the PLC, and the slave stations make communications with the PLC via the master station. V master station V slave station V slave station V slave station Local port Local port Local port Local port 4 CN MJ CN CN CN RS-C RS-4 RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable V6-MLT ( m) RS-4 connection PLC On a network with V06 units, a PLC is connected to MJ of the master station, the MJ of the master station is connected to MJ of the slave stations, and the slave stations are connected with each other via MJ. V06 master station V06 slave station V06 slave station V06 slave station Local port Local port Local port Local port 4 * MJ MJ MJ * MJ * MJ * RS-C RS-4 RS-4 Hakko Electronics cable V6-MLT ( m) RS-4 connection PLC * In the case of V06 + DU-0, connect to CN. Communications between the V master station and the PLC depend on the communication speed set on the PLC. The maximum available speed for the V series is kbps, which is higher than the one available with multi-link connection described in Appendix, n : Connection (Multi-link).

241 App- Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) Wiring This multi-link connection is available with almost all the PLC models that support : connection (refer to the Appendix ). (The connection between the master station and the PLC is the same as the one for : connection.) Use the RS-4 -wire connection between stations of the V series. Please use Hakko Electronics multi-link master cable (V6-MLT) for connection between the master station (local port ) and the slave station (local port ). In the following cases, multi-link connection is not available.. A communication interface unit (example: OPCN-, CC-LINK, Ethernet, etc) is used.. The V6 series (master or slave station) is used for the temperature control network or PLCWay function. The V and V6 series can be used together. The V6 series can be the master station. (However, when V606/V606i is the master station, the slave station must be V606/V606i. Also, depending on the hardware version of the V6 series, multi-link connection may not be supported. Refer to the V6 Hardware Specifications.) Connection For V Series: PLC Communications between V series: RS-4 (-wire), maximum length = 00 m (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) CN MJ V master station (= Local Port ) Terminal block CN V slave station (= Local Port ) CN V slave station (= Local Port ) CN V slave station (= Local Port 4) (a) (b)(c) (d)(e) Connection between PLC V master station The communication parameter setting and connecting method are the same as those for : connection. (Refer to Chapter to Chapter. ) Connection between V series master station V slave station The connecting port for the V series master station depends on the selection for [Multi-Link] (either [Modular Jack ] or [Modular Jack ]) on the V-SFT editor. Selection of [Modular Jack ] is recommended. ([Editor Port] is set as default for [Modular Jack ].) The connecting port of the V series slave station should be CN. It is recommended that CN be equipped with a terminal converter TC4 (set to -wire connection). The multi-link master cable (b) (V6-MLT) is m long. If the distance (c) between the V series master station and the V series slave station is longer than m, use a terminal block and connect the cables. Connection between V series slave station V slave station Use the RS-4 -wire connection. It is recommended that CN be equipped with a terminal converter TC4 (set to -wire connection). (b)(c)(d)(e) The maximum length between V series should be 00 m. * To avoid line-noise problems, connect one terminal only so that the shielded frame ground of each cable will not be connected between the V series. The shielded frame ground of V6-MLT must be connected to the V series master station.

242 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) App- * When the terminal converter TC4 is not used, install jumpers between +RD/+SD and RD/ SD. (b) (c) (d) (e) V master station MJ/ To be installed by the user Terminal block V slave station CN + TC4 V slave station CN + TC4 V slave station CN + TC4 FG FG FG + + +SD SD +SD SD +SD SD +RD +RD +RD RD RD RD Terminating resistance (ON) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (ON) For V06: For V06 + DU-0, refer to For V Series: above. (a) PLC * Communications between V06: RS-4 (-wire), maximum length = 00 m (b) (d) (e) Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block MJ MJ V06 master station (= Local Port ) (c) * (c) * (c) * MJ * MJ * MJ * V06 slave station (= Local Port ) V06 slave station (= Local Port ) V06 slave station (= Local Port 4) * 0. m recommended (.0 m maximum) * Set the slide switches on the V06 slave stations to the upper position: RS-C/4. * Use twisted-pair cables of 0. mm sq. or greater between terminal blocks. (a) (b) (C) Connection between PLC V06 master station (MJ) The communication parameter setting and connecting method are the same as those for : connection. (Refer to Chapter to Chapter. ) Connection between V06 master station (MJ) V06 slave station (MJ) The connecting port of the V06 master station should be MJ. Select [Modular Jack] from the [System Setting] menu. Select [Multi-Link] for [Modular Jack ]. The multi-link master cable (b) (V6-MLT) is m long. From the M06 master station, the V6-MLT cable is connected to the terminal block. From the terminal block, cables are routed in the direction of (c) and (d). Connection between terminal block V06 slave station (MJ) The connecting port of the V06 slave station should be MJ. A V6-MLT cable ( m long) is used as cable (c). For multi-link connection, it is necessary to change the MJ signal connection to -wire system. Be sure to set the slide switch on the V06 to the upper position (RS-C/RS-4).

243 App-4 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) (d)(e) Connection between terminal blocks Use the RS-4 -wire connection. (b) (c) V06 master station MJ Terminating resistance (ON) Terminal block to be installed by the user V06 slave station MJ * Terminating resistance (OFF) (d) + - Terminal block to be installed by the user + V06 slave station MJ * Terminating resistance (OFF) (e) + - Terminal block to be installed by the user V06 slave station MJ * + Terminating resistance (ON) * Set the slide switches on the V06 slave stations to the upper position: RS-C/4. (b)(c)(d)(e) The maximum length between V06 should be 00 m. ((d)(e) Twisted pairs of 0. mm sq. or above are recommended.)

244 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) App- Terminating Resistance Setting For V Series: The terminating resistance of the V series should be set on the DIP switch. ON 4 6 CF auto load MJ (modular jack ) terminating resistance Not used CN RD terminating resistance at pins 4 and MJ (modular jack ) terminating resistance CN SD terminating resistance at pins and When the PLC and the master station are connected via RS-4/4, set the terminating resistance at the PLC and the master station (CN). When the V series (master and slave stations) are connected via RS-4 (-wire), set the terminating resistance at the V series master station (MJ/) and the terminating slave station (CN). Terminating Resistance Setting Example. When the PLC is connected to V series master station via RS-C: PLC RS-C RS-4 (-wire) CN MJ/ V master station (= Local Port ) Terminal block CN V slave station (= Local Port ) CN V slave station (= Local Port ) CN V slave station (= Local Port 4) When MJ is used: ON 4 6 ON 4 6 ON 4 6 ON 4 6 When MJ is used: ON 4 6. When the PLC is connected to V series master station via RS-4/4: PLC RS-4/4 RS-4 (-wire) CN MJ/ V master station (= Local Port ) Terminal block CN V slave station (= Local Port ) CN V slave station (= Local Port ) CN V slave station (= Local Port 4) When MJ is used: ON 4 6 ON 4 6 ON 4 6 ON 4 6 When MJ is used: ON 4 6

245 App-6 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) For V06 + DU-0 The DIP switches on the V06 and the option unit DU-0 are used to set the terminating resistances. DIP switch on DU-0 CN RD terminating resistance at pins 4 and CN SD terminating resistance at pins and Not used Not used DIP switch on V06 MJ (modular jack ) terminating resistance for RS-4 MJ (modular jack ) SD terminating resistance for RS-4 MJ (modular jack ) RD terminating resistance for RS-4 CF auto load (for USB/DU-0) 4 ON 4 ON When the PLC and the master station are connected via RS-4/4, set the terminating resistance at the PLC and the master station (DU-0 CN). When the V series (master and slave stations) are connected via RS-4 (-wire), set the terminating resistance at the V series master station (MJ/) and the terminating slave station (CN). Terminating Resistance Setting Example. When the PLC is connected to V06 series master station via RS-C: PLC RS-C Terminal block RS-4 (-wire) CN DU-0 MJ/ V06 master station (= Local Port ) CN DU-0 V slave station (= Local Port ) CN DU-0 V slave station (= Local Port ) CN DU-0 V slave station (= Local Port 4) When MJ is used: 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON When MJ is used: 4 ON 4 ON. When the PLC is connected to V series master station via RS-4/4: PLC RS-4/4 Terminal block RS-4 (-wire) CN DU-0 MJ/ V master station (= Local Port ) CN DU-0 V slave station (= Local Port ) CN DU-0 V slave station (= Local Port ) CN DU-0 V slave station (= Local Port 4) When MJ is used: 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON When MJ is used: 4 ON 4 ON

246 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) App- For V06: The terminating resistance of the V06 should be set on the DIP switch. MJ (modular jack ) terminating resistance for RS-4 MJ (modular jack ) SD terminating resistance for RS-4 MJ (modular jack ) RD terminating resistance for RS-4 CF auto load (for USB or DU-0) 4 ON When the PLC and the master station are connected via RS-4/4, set the terminating resistance at the PLC and the master station (MJ). When the V06 (master and slave stations) are connected via RS-4 (-wire), set the terminating resistance at the V06 master station (MJ) and the terminating slave station (MJ). Terminating Resistance Setting Example. When the PLC is connected to V06 master station via RS-C: PLC RS-C RS-4 (-wire) Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block MJ MJ V06 master station (= Local Port ) MJ V06 slave station (= Local Port ) MJ V06 slave station (= Local Port ) MJ V06 slave station (= Local Port 4) 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON 4 ON V-SFT Setting The following settings must be made on the V-SFT editor. Only the points different from those described in V-SFT Setting ( : Connection) (page -0) are explained here. PLC Selection Select the PLC that is connected. Setting Procedure [System Setting] [PLC type] [Select PLC type] dialog Check [ Display Multi-link PLC]. The PLC list compatible with multi-link connection is displayed.

247 App- Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link ) Communication Parameter Setting Setting Procedure [System Setting] [Comm. Parameter] [Comm. Parameter] dialog Setting Items [Connection] Select [Multi-Link ]. Click [Setting]. The [Multi-Link ] dialog is displayed. Make the necessary settings. For the V series master station, set the following items. For the V series slave station, set the items marked with. [Local Port] ( to 4) Set the port number of the V series. For the V series master station, set. For the V series slave station, set to 4. Set the unique port number for each V series. If the number duplicates, communications will not be performed correctly. [Send Delay Time] (0 to ) (Unit: msec) PLC Set a time delay in sending the response to the PLC after receipt of data from the PLC. MONITOUCH Normally use the default setting (0). [Total] ( to 4) Set the total number of the V series included in the multi-link connection. [Retry Cycle] ( 0) Set the number of cycles before the master station sends an inquiry for restoration to the slave station that has a communication problem (= system down). When a slave station has a problem, it is temporarily removed from the communication targets, and the master station sends an inquiry for restoration every number of cycles specified for [Retry Cycle]. This setting does not affect the communication speed if no problem is occurring; however, if there is any problem, it does affect the communication speed. When the setting value is small: It will not take a long time before restoration. When the setting value is large: It will take a longer time before restoration. [Baud Rate of Multi-Link] (400, 9600, 900, 400, 600, 600, k bps) Set the baud rate used for communications between the V series. The setting must be the same as other V series on the same communication line. * For [Total] and [Baud Rate of Multi-Link], the same values must be set on all the V series that are connected in the same communication line. * Make the following setting when is set for [Local Port] on the [Comm. Parameter] dialog on the V series master station. Select [System Setting] [Modular Jack]. Select [Multi-Link] for [Modular Jack ] or [Modular Jack ]. Connect the multi-link master cable (V6-MLT) to the modular jack selected for [Multi-Link]. Communication Error Send delay time t Supplemental Information: [Retrials] in the [Detail] tab window of the [Comm. Parameter] dialog is the number of retrials that the V series master station sends an inquiry to the PLC. If the master station has a communication error, the master and slave stations do not work, and as a result, the communication error Time-out is displayed. If a slave station becomes faulty, the communication error (check) occurs only on this station.

248 RUN STOP Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link) App- Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link) Multi-link One PLC is connected to multiple V series. (Maximum connectable V series: ) V series No. V series No. V series No. V series No. n (n = to ) CN CN CN CN Maximum length (PLC to the terminating V series) = 00 m RS-4/RS-4 connection PLC V06 No. V06 No. V06 No. V series No. n (n = to ) * MJ MJ * MJ * MJ * * Maximum length (PLC to the terminating V series) = 00 m RS-4/RS-4 connection PLC * In the case of V06 + DU-0, connect to CN. * Use twisted-pair cables of 0. mm sq. or greater between terminal blocks. The PLC must be of the type of signal level RS-4/RS-4 with port numbers. RS-4 connection between the V series PLC must be in -wire connection. The V and V6 series can be used together.

249 App- Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link) Wiring Use the RS-4 -wire connection. Connection with Link Unit For V Series: It is recommended that Hakko Electronics optional terminal converter TC4 be used. When TC4 is used: Set -wire connection at the DIP switch (SW) on TC4. When a jumper is required on the PLC: TC4 FG TC4 TC4 Shield Shield Shield FG FG To the PLC s RS-4 port of the link unit +SD +SD +SD Receive data (+) SD SD SD Receive data ( ) +RD +RD +RD Send data (+) RD RD RD Send data ( ) Terminating resistance (ON) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (ON) When no jumper is required on the PLC: TC4 FG +SD SD +RD RD TC4 TC4 Shield Shield Shield FG +SD SD +RD RD FG +SD SD +RD RD To the PLC s RS-4 port of the link unit Send/receive data (+) Send/receive data ( ) Terminating resistance (ON) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (ON) When TC4 is not used: Install jumpers between +RD/+SD and RD/ SD.

250 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link) App- For V06: For V06 + DU-0, refer to For V Series: above. For multi-link connection, it is necessary to change the MJ signal connection to -wire system. Be sure to set the slide switch on the V06 to the upper position (RS-C/RS-4). When a jumper is required on the PLC: V06 MJ * SHELL Shield To the PLC s RS-4 port of the link unit +SD +SD Receive data (+) Terminating resistance (OFF) -SD +RD -SD +RD Receive data ( ) Send data (+) -RD -RD Send data ( ) V06 MJ * SHELL Terminating resistance (ON) +SD +SD Terminating resistance (OFF) -SD +RD -SD +RD -RD -RD V06 MJ * SHELL +SD +SD Terminating resistance (ON) -SD +RD -SD +RD -RD -RD * Slide the slide switch on the V06 to the upper position for RS-C/4.

251 App-4 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link) When Connecting Directly to the CPU of the MITSUBISHI QnA Series: Use the GD port of Hakko Electronics optional dual port interface V-MDD for the PLC CPU port. Also the use of Hakko Electronics optional terminal converter TC4 is recommended. For V Series: When TC4 is used: Set -wire connection at the DIP switch (SW) on TC4. V+TC4 FG V+TC4 FG V+TC4 FG V-MDD GD port +SD +SD +SD +RxD SD SD SD +TxD +RD +RD +RD 4 +DSR RD RD RD +DTR RD terminating resistance (ON) RD terminating resistance (OFF) * Use shielded twist-pair cables. RD terminating resistance (OFF) 6 0 RxD TxD DSR DTR When TC4 is not used: Install jumpers between +RD/+SD and RD/ SD.

252 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link) App- For V06: For V06 + DU-0, refer to For V Series: above. V06 MJ * V-MDD GD port SHELL RD terminating resistance (OFF) +SD -SD +SD -SD +RxD +TxD +RD +RD 4 +DSR -RD -RD +DTR V06 MJ * SHELL 6 0 RxD TxD DSR DTR RD terminating resistance (OFF) +SD -SD +SD -SD +RD +RD -RD -RD V06 MJ * SHELL RD terminating resistance (ON) +SD -SD +RD +SD -SD +RD * Slide the slide switch on the V06 to the upper position for RS-C/4. -RD -RD

253 App-6 Appendix n : Connection (Multi-link) V-SFT Setting The following settings must be made on the V-SFT editor. Only the points different from those described in V-SFT Setting ( : Connection) (page -0) are explained here. PLC Selection Select the PLC that is connected. Check that the PLC to be connected is ready for multi-link connection. Refer to Connection Compatibility List at the back of this manual. Setting Procedure [System Setting] [PLC Type] [Select PLC Type] dialog Communication Parameter Setting Setting Procedure [System Setting] [Comm. Parameter] [Comm. Parameter] dialog Setting Items [Connection] Select [Multi-Link]. Click [Setting]. The [Multi-Link] dialog is displayed. Make the necessary settings. [Local Port] ( to ) Set the port number of the V series. Set the unique port number for each V series. If the number duplicates, communications will not be performed correctly. [Send Delay Time] (0 to ) (Unit: msec) PLC Set a time delay in sending the response to the PLC after receipt of data from the PLC. MONITOUCH (Default setting: 0 msec) [Total] ( to ) Set the total number of the V series included in the connection. Send delay time t [Retry Cycle] ( 0) When the V series has a problem, it is temporarily removed from the communication targets, and the master station sends an inquiry for restoration every number of cycles specified for [Retry Cycle]. This setting does not affect the communication speed if no problem is occurring; however, if there is any problem, it does affect the communication speed. When the setting value is small: It will not take a long time before restoration. When the setting value is large: It will take a longer time before restoration. Supplemental Information: [Retrials] in the [Detail] tab window of the [Comm. Parameter] dialog is the number of retrials that the V series sends an inquiry to the PLC. * For [Send Delay Time], [Total] and [Retry Cycle], the same values must be set on all the V series that are connected in the same communication line.

254 RUN STOP RUN STOP RUN STOP RUN STOP Appendix 4 : n Connection (Multi-drop) App4- Appendix 4 : n Connection (Multi-drop) : n Connection One V series is connected to multiple PLCs. (Maximum connectable PLCs: ) V series CN Maximum length (V series to the terminating PLC) = 00 m RS-4/RS-4 connection PLC PLC PLC PLCn (n = to ) V06 MJ * Maximum length (V06 to the terminating PLC) = 00 m RS-4/RS-4 connection PLC PLC PLC PLCn (n = to ) * In the case of V06 + DU-0, connect to CN.

255 App4- Appendix 4 : n Connection (Multi-drop) Wiring (RS-4/4) For connecting information, refer to the instruction manual for the PLC. Example: The following example shows how one V series is connected to three PLCs made by MITSUBISHI. For more information, refer to MITSUBISHI s instruction manual for the PLC. * +SD -SD +RD -RD V06 MJ * SHELL V Series CN 4 Link unit Link unit Link unit FG RDA RDB SDA SDB FG RDA RDB SDA SDB FG RDA RDB SDA SDB RD terminating resistance (ON) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (ON) * of CN is used as FG. The metal shell of the modular jack on the V06 is used as. * Slide the slide switch on the V06 to the lower position for RS-4. * Use shielded twist-pair cables. V-SFT Setting The following settings must be made on the V-SFT editor. Only the points different from those described in V-SFT Setting ( : Connection) (page -0) are explained here. PLC Selection Select the PLC that is connected. Check that the PLC to be connected is ready for : n connection. Refer to the Appendix. Setting Procedure [System Setting] [PLC Type] [Select PLC Type] dialog Communication Parameter Setting Setting Procedure [System Setting] [Comm. Parameter] [Comm. Parameter] dialog Setting Items Select : n for [Connection]. PLC Port Setting Set the port number of each PLC not in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog but in the [Memory Setting] dialog for each part.

256 Appendix 4 : n Connection (Multi-drop) App4- Notes on Communication Errors Processing for PLC Failure If a communication error/timeout is detected during communications with a PLC, the PLC failure information is stored in internal system memory addresses $s 4 to 9 of the V. No further communication with the PLC is attempted until a macro command is executed or the display screen changes. If a communication error/timeout is detected while accessing the [Read Area], the error is processed in the same manner as for : connection. Supplemental Information: Internal system memory The internal system memory is the one for the V series system. Using the macro command RECONNECT, communications can be resumed without the display screen change. [RECONNECT] In the case of a multi-drop connection, communication with the port (specified with F0 ) that caused the failure is resumed once. Usable Devices F0 Internal Memory PLC Memory Constant Memory Card Indirect Designation RECONNECT F0 F0 0 to Resumes communication with the desired port. Resumes communication with all ports. When communication is resumed, the failure information is cleared from the system memory ($s4 to 9). With Internal Memory Set For [Read Area], [Write Area], and [Calendar] In the case that the internal memory is set for [Read Area], [Write Area] and [Calendar], no initial connection check is performed, and calendar information is read when the V series establishes communications with the PLC for the first time. A communication error does not occur on the V series if a timeout is detected while accessing to the PLC.

257 App4-4 Appendix 4 : n Connection (Multi-drop) Please use this page freely.

258 POWER PROGRAMMER POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER POWER PROGRAMMER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F Appendix Ethernet App- Appendix Ethernet Ethernet Transferring data in memory Data in memory can be transferred to the V series on the Ethernet or to the PLCs linked to the V series as a host by using macro commands (EREAD/EWRITE). Ethernet <V> RS-C RS-4 <PLC> Communications between the server and the V series - HKEtn0.dll (for UDP/IP protocol) is provided so that the user can create an original application by using Visual C++ or Visual Basic, etc. to allow the server to access the memory device, such as V internal memory, memory card or the PLC memory linked with the V series as a host... (a) - The macro command (SEND) enables the V series to access the server... (b) Server Application (a) (b) Ethernet <V> RS-C RS-4 <PLC>

259 POWER PROGRAMMER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER POWER POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F PROGRAMMER POWER POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F App- Appendix Ethernet - Screen data can be transferred from the V-SFT editor on the server to the V series. Server V-SFT Ethernet <V> Ethernet-ready PLC RS-C RS-4 <PLC> Communications between the Ethernet-ready PLC and the V series - The MONITOUCH can communicate with the PLC on the Ethernet. Ethernet <PLC:> * Ethernet-ready PLC only <V:> <V:> <V:n> - The MONITOUCH can communicate with multiple PLCs on the Ethernet. Ethernet <PLC:> * Ethernet-ready PLC only <PLC:n> <V:> <V:n>

260 Appendix Ethernet App- LAN Port Specifications For Vi: To use Ethernet communications on Vi, use the LAN connector provided on the unit. It is not possible to use Ethernet or FL-net (OPCN-) communications by attaching the communication I/F unit CU-0- to Vi at the same time. When CU-0- is mounted, the LAN connector provided on the unit cannot be used. When using Ethernet communications with CU-0- mounted, the Web server or function cannot be used. LAN Specifications Item Specifications 0BASE-T 00BASE-TX* Baud rate 0 Mbps 00 Mbps Transmission method Base band Maximum network distance 00 m (Cascade 4-stage) 00 m (Cascade -stage) or maximum node interval Maximum segment length 00 m (between the node and the HUB) Connecting cable UTP (unshielded twisted pair) -6AWG Protocol UDP/IP, TCP/IP* * For connection with some PLCs * It is available with SYSTEM PROG. Ver..40 (V-SFT Ver....0) and later. For V: To use Ethernet communications on V, the communication interface unit CU-0- must be mounted. In this case, however, the Web server or function is not available. Specifications of Communication Interface Unit CU-0 Item Baud rate Transmission method Maximum network distance or maximum node interval 0BASE AUI Specifications 0BASE 0 Mbps Base band 0BASE-T 00 m ( segments) 9 m ( segments) 00 m (Cascade 4-stage) Maximum segment length 00 m m 00 m (between the node and the HUB) Maximum number of nodes 00/segment 0/segment /segment Minimum node interval. m 0. m - Connecting cable Protocol Ethernet coaxial cable (0 Ω) RGA/U, RGC/U coaxial cable (0 Ω) UDP/IP UTP (unshielded twisted pair) -6AWG

261 4 C C 4 App-4 Appendix Ethernet s and Functions of Components ADR - LOW - HI FUSE 0V 0B-T RX TX LNK CI 6 AUI +V 4. LED Indicates the status of the communication. Contents On Off RX Data receive status Currently receiving Not receiving TX Data send status Currently sending Not sending LNK Link status (for 0BASE-T only) Normal Error Cl Collision Data collision Normal. Port number setting switches Set the port number of V specified on the network table using the following rotary switches. Example: To set port No. : ADR - LOW - HI E D F 0 E D F 0 * Make sure that each I/F unit on the network has a unique port number. B 6 B 6 A 9 A 9. Fuse This is the fuse for VDC power supply. (Rating A) 4. 0BASE-T connector This connector is used for 0BASE-T connection. (Compliant with IEEE0.). AUI connector This connector is used for connecting the transceiver cable in the case of 0BASE or 0BASE. 6. VDC power supply terminal The power source is required for the transceiver of AUI connection. Be sure to take account of a voltage drop at CU-0- (max. 0. V). * It is not necessary to use 0BASE-T.

262 Appendix Ethernet App- For V06: To use Ethernet communications with the V06, an optional unit, DU-0, is necessary. Web server and functions are available. Specifications of Option Unit DU-0 Item Specifications 0BASE-T 00BASE-TX* Baud rate 0 Mbps 00 Mbps Transmission method Base band Maximum network distance 00 m (Cascade 4-stage) 00 m (Cascade -stage) or maximum node interval Maximum segment length 00 m (between the node and the HUB) Connecting cable UTP (unshielded twisted pair) -6AWG Protocol UDP/IP, TCP/IP* * For connection with some PLCs * It is available with SYSTEM PROG. Ver..40 (V-SFT Ver....0) and later. Port Position When the DU-0 mounted on the V06, the LAN port faces downward. Bottom View DU-0 V06 IP Address for the V Series To enable Ethernet communications on the V series, it is necessary to set the IP address for identification of the V series on the network. For more information on the IP address setting for V series, refer to the V-SFT Additional Specifications. For V06, refer to the V06 Hardware Specifications.

263 App-6 Appendix Ethernet Wiring 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX Connection Cable connection diagram UTP cable Straight HUB UTP cable Straight or cross cable (For more information, refer to the HUB specifications.) DU-0 CU-0 PLC Ethernet unit V06 Vi V HUB Distance between the node and the HUB: 00 m maximum Maximum network nodes: 00 Node Straight cable (with HUB) Cross cable (without HUB) RJ-4 Pin RJ-4 Pin RJ-4 Pin RJ-4 Pin * Unshielded twist-pair cable * Unshielded twist-pair cable Notes on cables Use the following recommended cable. Recommended cable 0BASE-T/00BASE-TX Type: Twist-pair cable, category

264 Appendix Ethernet App- AUI Connection 0BASE The following devices are required for 0BASE connection: - Coaxial cable for 0BASE - AUI cable - N-type connector - N-type terminator - Transceiver - Power supply for the transceiver: VDC segment (max. 00 m, max. 00 nodes) AUI cable (max 0 m) Minimum node interval. m PLC Ethernet unit CU-0 V Node Repeater To extend the length or increase the number of nodes, use repeaters. Maximum segments: Maximum network distance: 00 m Maximum network nodes: 00 Transceiver * N-type terminator N-type connector *: V power supply is required for each transceiver. Node Node Transceiver Use the transceiver equipped with the SQE TEST function. (SQE TEST : Quality Error Test) Recommended transceiver Manufacturer Type Allied Telesis CentreCOM 0 * The I/F unit may be broken if the AUI connector is subject to strong force. Use the AUI cable when connecting the transceiver. * When the power lamp of the transceiver is not turned on, check the wiring of VDC power supply, then replace the fuse (refer to page App-4) of the I/F unit CU-0-. For the replacement procedure, refer to the manual CU-0- OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, attached to CU-0-.

265 App- Appendix Ethernet 0BASE The following devices are required for 0BASE connection: - Coaxial cable for 0BASE - AUI cable - T-type adaptor - Terminator for 0BASE - Transceiver - Power supply for the transceiver: VDC Transceiver segment (max. m, max. 0 nodes) AUI cable (max 0 m) Minimum node interval 0. m PLC Ethernet unit * CU-0 V PLC Ethernet unit Repeater To extend the segment distance or increase the number of nodes, use repeaters. T-type Maximum segments: Maximum network distance: 9 m Maximum network nodes: 00 Node * Terminator Transceiver * * The unit may have a built-in transceiver. Refer to the instruction manual for the unit. * V power supply is required for each transceiver. Node Use the transceiver equipped with the SQE TEST function. (SQE TEST: Quality Error Test) Recommended transceiver Manufacturer Type Allied Telesis CentreCOM 0 * The I/F unit may be broken if the AUI connector is subject to strong force. Use the AUI cable when connecting the transceiver. * When the power lamp of the transceiver is not turned on, check the wiring of VDC power supply, then replace the fuse (refer to page App-4) of the I/F unit CU-0-. For the replacement procedure, refer to the manual CU-0- OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, attached to CU-0-.

266 Appendix Ethernet App-9 Transferring Screen Data This section describes the procedure for transferring screen data from the V-SFT editor on the server to MONITOUCH via Ethernet. For the procedure using the V6-CP cable, refer to the Reference Manual (Operation). Prerequisites When screen data is to be transferred for the first time via Ethernet or when the V series has been replaced due to trouble, the server cannot transfer screen data because the network table has not been transferred to the V series. In this case, the following setting must be made on the Main Menu screen: - IP address - Default gateway - Subnet mask The port number must be When the network table is transferred from the V-SFT editor, the above data is updated. Setting Procedure. Press the [Ethernet] switch on the Main Menu screen.. The Ethernet screen is displayed. (For more information, refer to Chapter 6, MONITOUCH Operations in the V Hardware Specifications Manual or V06 Hardware Specifications Manual.) Set the IP address. If necessary, set the default gateway and subnet mask. (When attaching the I/F unit CU-0- to V, set the connecting method (0BASE-T/AUI) as well.). When the setting has been completed, press the [Setting Finished] switch. The Main Menu screen is displayed again. 4. The setting data can be reviewed on the Main Menu screen. Main Menu V 0 i T D ::0 System Information SYSTEM PROG. VER..00 Screen Data Information Size : FONT VER..00 /.000 /.000 ENGLISH PLC Type : YOKOGAWAFA-M/FA-MR(Ethernet) Comment : PORT: 0000 MAC: 000FF0000 I/F DRV VER..0 YOKOGAWA FA-M Ethernet Ethernet Information Error : Stop Time-Out : 0.0 sec Trans.Speed : 0BASE-T Retry : Stat. No. : Ethernet Information PORT: 0000 MAC: 000FF0000 Trans.Speed : 0BASE-T Stat. No. : SRAM/Clock Ethernet Editor:MJ Card Menu I/O Test. Transfer screen data from the server.

267 App-0 Appendix Ethernet Transferring Screen Data from V-SFT Editor. Click the [Transfer] icon. The [Transfer] dialog is displayed.. Attach a check mark ( ) to [ Transfer through Ethernet].. Click the [Detail Setting] button. The [IP Address Setting] dialog is displayed. 4. Enter the IP address of the V series to which the screen data is to be transferred. When a list is shown, select the IP address of the V series, and click the [<<] button. The host name and the IP address are automatically entered. Click [OK].

268 Appendix Ethernet App-. Check the IP address, and click [PC->]. IP address for transfer target 6. Data transfer is started.

269 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F App- Appendix Ethernet V-SFT Setting: PLC Type/Communication Parameter To enable Ethernet communications between the V series and a PLC, the following setting is required on the V-SFT editor. PLC type setting Communication parameter setting Network table editing In this section, the PLC type setting and communication parameter setting are explained. Connection Example Server Application (B) Ethernet (A) RS-C RS-4 Ethernet-ready PLC There are two connecting methods between the V series and the PLC. (A) Connecting to the PLC through RS-C or RS-4 interface (B) Connecting to the PLC on the Ethernet The contents of the system setting vary depending on the method selected. Check the connecting method and make the setting on the V-SFT editor. (A) Connecting to the PLC through RS-C or RS-4 interface. PLC type setting Select [System Setting] [PLC Type] and select the PLC to be used.. Communication parameter setting Select [System Setting] [Comm. Parameter]. Attach a check mark ( ) to [Use Ethernet].. Select [System Setting] [Network Table Setting] [Ethernet]. The network table edit window is displayed. Edit the network table. For more information on network table editing, refer to page App-6.

270 Appendix Ethernet App- (B) Connecting to the PLC on the Ethernet. PLC type setting Select [System Setting] [PLC Type] and select the PLC that shows [xxxxx (Ethernet XXXXX)]. At present (July, 004), the following PLC models are supported. Manufacturer Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port No. (DEC) ALLEN-BRADLEY * Hitachi KEYENCE LG Matsushita Electric Works MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC OMRON SHARP Toyoda Machine Works Yokogawa Electric PLC- (Ethernet) PLC- SLC00 (Ethernet) SLC /0 Control Logix (Ethernet) Control Logix PLC-/0E, PLC-/40E, PLC-/0E 4-L-, 4-L-, 4-L- 6-ENET-A 6-ENBT-A No. of Clients 44 fixed - HIDIC-H (Ethernet) * EH-0 EH-ETH H series LAN-ETH EH-WD0DR - - HIDIC-S0/α, S0mini (Ethernet) HIDEIC-S0V (Ethernet) * S0 α S0 mini S0V LQE00 40 fixed 4 LQE0 40 fixed 4 LQP fixed each KV-00 (Ethernet UDP/IP) 0 - KV-00 KV-00 (Ethernet TCP/IP) * KV-LE0 00 KV-000 (Ethernet TCP/IP) * KV MASTER-K series (Ethernet) GLOFA GM series (Ethernet) KP-0AS - G6L-EUTB 00 fixed GM6-CPUA - FP series (Ethernet TCP/IP) * FP FP-ET FP series (Ethernet UDP/IP) QnA series (Ethernet) QnH (Q) series (Ethernet) SYSMAC CS/CJ (Ethernet) SYSMAC CS/CJ (Ethernet Auto) SYSMAC CS/CJ DNA (Ethernet) JW series (Ethernet) JW/// series (Ethernet) JW//4/4/ /6 series (Ethernet) TOYOPUC (Ethernet) FA-M/FA-M R (Ethernet) QA, QA, Q4A, QASx QnH (Q mode) CS CJ JW0H/0H AJQE, AJQE-B, ASJQE-B, ASJQE-B QJE, QJE-B CSW-ETN0 CJW-ETN * JW00 series JWCM 0 - JWTCM JW00 series 0 - L/PC series PCJ FA-M FA-M R FL/ET-T-V FLE0-T, FLE-0T 9 fixed - -

271 App-4 Appendix Ethernet Manufacturer Select PLC Type PLC Unit Port No. (DEC) MODBUS TCP/IP (Ethernet) * (adapted to MODBUS TCP/IP) No. of Clients (adapted to MODBUS TCP/IP) 0 fixed - * Adapted to the Vi-series built-in LAN port and V06 + DU-0, and not to CU-0- * Default when the automatic open UDP port is in use If the open setting on the ladder tool software is used, the port number specified for the open setting takes effect.. The memory use is the same as the one for : connection. (Refer to Chapter to Chapter. ) * The data code of the V series is fixed to the binary code. Be sure to set the binary code for the data code on the PLC.. Communication parameter setting Select [System Setting] [Comm. Parameter]. Set the PLC to the V series which is connected. When the network table is not set: Network table No. 0 is displayed. It is not possible to select an option for [Connect To]. Select [System Setting] [Network Table Setting] [Ethernet]. The [Edit Network Table] window is displayed. Set the network table, and then go back to the communication parameter setting. For more information on network table editing, refer to page App-6. When the network table is set: The IP addresses that are set on the network table are displayed. Select the IP address of the desired PLC. Click here. A drop-down list is displayed.

272 Appendix Ethernet App- When communicating with multiple PLCs (same model) on the Ethernet, select [ : n] for [Connection] on the [Detail] tab window. Set the port number (network table number) of the PLC in the [Memory Input] dialog for each part. For more information on the network table, refer to page App-6. [Memory Input] [Edit Network Table]

273 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F App-6 Appendix Ethernet V-SFT Setting: Network Table Editing To enable Ethernet communications on the V series, the following network table setting is required on the V-SFT editor. Network table The V series, PLCs and PCs on the Ethernet must be registered on the network table. In the case of the network illustrated below, the nodes with ( ) should be registered on the network table. Server Application V-SFT Ethernet RS-C RS-4 Ethernet-ready PLC The network table is transferred to the V series together with screen data. Server V-SFT Transfer <PC> Screen data I/F driver Network table <V>

274 Appendix Ethernet App- Starting and Closing Starting Select [System Setting] [Network Table Setting] [Ethernet]. The network table edit window is displayed. [Close] button Closing Select [File] [Exit], or click the [Close] button. Menu and Icons Each menu item corresponds to the icons as shown below. [File] menu - Import Network Table Imports a network table saved as a file.ntb. - Export Network Table Exports a network table as a file.ntb. [Edit] menu - Use Monitor Registration Only one V series can be registered as the monitor for Ethernet communications. A mark is shown on the left of the network table number.

275 App- Appendix Ethernet - Cancel Monitor Registration Click this menu when canceling monitor registration. [View] menu The items with a check mark are shown on the network table editing window. Editing the Network Table Double-click the number. The [Set Network Table No. *] dialog is displayed. Network table number [Host ] Set the name for the V series, etc. to be used on the Ethernet. [IP Address] Set the IP address. * When registering Ethernet-ready PLC, set the same IP address as that of the PLC. For the setting procedure of the IP address on the PLC, see the manual attached to each PLC. * When registering a computer as the server, set the same IP address as that of the computer. When setting the IP address on the computer, open [Property] of [TCP/IP] in [Network] on the Windows. * To connect to the intra-company network, consult with the network administrator.

276 Appendix Ethernet App-9 IP Address This is an address that is used for recognizing each node on the Ethernet and should be unique. The IP address is -bit data which consists of the network address and the host address and can be classified into A to C depending on the network size. Class A Network 0 address () Host address (4) Class B 0 Network address (4) Host address (6) Class C Network address (4) Host address () 0 Notation A string of -bit data is divided into four, and each segment delimited with a period is in decimal notation. Example: The IP address in class C shown below is represented as Unusable IP addresses: 0 is specified for one byte at the extreme left. Example: 0.x.x.x is specified for one byte at the extreme left (loop back address). Example:.x.x.x 4 or more is specified for one byte at the extreme left (for multi-cast or experiment). Example: 4.x.x.x The host address consists of only 0 or (broadcast address). Example:.0.., [Send Timeout] Set the time-out time for the V series to send a EREAD/EWRITE command on the Ethernet. [Port No.] (6 to 6) (Default: 0000) Set the port number. The port number may be fixed depending on the PLC model. For more information, refer to (B) Connecting to the PLC on the Ethernet (page App-) or the individual PLC manuals. Port No. Multiple applications are running on each node, and communications are carried out for each application between the nodes. Consequently, it is necessary to have a means to identify the application that data should be transferred to. The port number works as this identifier. Each port number is 6-bit data (from 0 to 6). However, since some numbers are already used, the setting range available with Vi or V06 is from 6 to 6. It is recommended to set a greater number. Note that 00 is allocated to the port for screen data transfer from the editor. Use a number other than 00. [Select Port] Select either AUI or 0BASE-T. When connecting to the LAN connector of Vi or V06 + DU-0, select [0BASE-T]. Select either [0BASE-T] or [AUI] when CU-0- is mounted. [Memory Protect] Attach a check mark ( ) when write-protecting the internal memory or memory card. [Default Gateway] Attach a check mark ( ) when setting the default gateway. Default Gateway A gateway and a router are used for communicating between different networks. The IP address of the gateway (router) should be set to communicate with the node(s) on other network.

277 App-0 Appendix Ethernet [Sub Net Mask] Attach a check mark ( ) when setting the subnet mask. When this option is checked, it is set to [...0]. Subnet Mask A subnet mask is used for dividing one network address into multiple networks (subnet). The subnet is assigned by specifying a part of the host address in the IP address as a subnet address. Class B 0 Network address (4) Host address (6) Subnet mask Unusable subnet masks All bits are set to 0. : All bits are set to. : Network address Subnet address Host address

278 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F Appendix Ethernet App- V-SFT Setting: Macro This section explains the macro commands (SEND/EREAD/EWRITE) used for the Ethernet. For more information on macro commands, refer to the Reference Manual (Function). Macro Command [EREAD] Words from the F memory in the V series of the network table number specified for F are read into the F0 memory. F designates the number of words to be read. Usable Devices Internal Memory PLC Memory Constant Memory Card Indirect Designation Doubleword IP Address F0 F F F EREAD: Read into memory EREAD F0 = F C: F F Example: Macro command at the V (A) The macro command for V (A) to read data from PLC (B) and transfer it to PLC (A) is shown below. [Description] EREAD D00 = D00 C: B Top memory address of the target Top memory address of the source Address of the source (Network table number) The number of words to be transferred [Contents] Two words starting from D00 in PLC (B) are read into D00 in PLC (A). Ethernet <V:A> EREAD <V:B> D00 ~ 0 <PLC:A> <PLC:B>

279 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F App- Appendix Ethernet [EWRITE] Words from the F memory are written into the F0 memory in the V series of the network table number specified for F. F designates the number of words to be written. Usable Devices Internal Memory PLC Memory Constant Memory Card Indirect Designation Doubleword IP Address F0 F F F EWRITE: Write to memory EWRITE F0 F = F C: F Example: Macro command at the V (A) The macro command for V (A) to write data in V (A) to PLC (B) is shown below. [Description] EWRITE D00 B = $u00 C: Top memory address of the target Address of the target (Network table number) The number of words to be transferred Top memory address of the source [Contents] Two words starting from $u00 in V (A) are written into D00 in PLC (B). Ethernet $u00 ~ 0 <V:A> EWRITE <V:B> D00 ~ 0 <PLC:A> <PLC:B>

280 POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F Appendix Ethernet App- [SEND] Words from the F0 memory are transferred to the server of the network table number specified for F. F designates the number of words to be transferred. Usable Devices Internal Memory PLC Memory Constant Memory Card Indirect Designation Doubleword IP Address F0 F F SEND: Send to server SEND F0 C: F TO: F Example: Macro command at the V (B) The macro command for V (B) to transfer data to server (A) is shown below. [Description] SEND $u00 C: TO: A Top memory address of the source The number of words to be transferred Address of the target (Network table number) [Contents] Two words starting from $u00 in V (B) are transferred to server (A). Server A Application Ethernet <V:B> SEND <PLC:B>

281 App-4 Appendix Ethernet System Memory The Ethernet status is output to the system memory ($s) of the V series. This section explains the memory addresses ($s4 to 69) where the Ethernet status is output. For other memory addresses, refer to the Reference Manual (Function). List Address Contents $s4 Macro user request wait (0: absent : present) Result of executing the macro user request wait 6 Ethernet status 9 0 Network table 0 status Network table status Network table status Network table status 4 Network table 4 status Network table status 6 Network table 6 status Network table status Network table status 9 Network table 9 status 0 Network table 0 status Network table status Network table status Network table status 4 Network table 4 status Network table status 6 Network table 6 status Network table status Network table status 9 Network table 9 status 40 Network table 0 status 4 Network table status 4 Network table status 4 Network table status 44 Network table 4 status 4 Network table status 46 Network table 6 status 4 Network table status 4 Network table status 49 Network table 9 status 0 Network table 0 status Network table status Network table status

282 Appendix Ethernet App- Address $s Network table status 4 Network table 4 status Network table status 6 Network table 6 status Network table status Network table status 9 Network table 9 status 60 Network table 40 status 6 Network table 4 status 6 Network table 4 status 6 Network table 4 status 64 Network table 44 status 6 Network table 4 status 66 Network table 46 status 6 Network table 4 status 6 Network table 4 status 69 Network table 49 status 0 Network table 0 status Network table status Network table status Network table status 4 Network table 4 status Network table status 6 Network table 6 status Network table status Network table status 9 Network table 9 status 0 Network table 60 status Network table 6 status Network table 6 status Network table 6 status 4 Network table 64 status Network table 6 status 6 Network table 66 status Network table 6 status Network table 6 status 9 Network table 69 status 90 Network table 0 status 9 Network table status 9 Network table status 9 Network table status 94 Network table 4 status 9 Network table status 96 Network table 6 status 9 Network table status 9 Network table status 99 Network table 9 status Contents

283 App-6 Appendix Ethernet Address $s600 Network table 0 status 60 Network table status 60 Network table status 60 Network table status 604 Network table 4 status 60 Network table status 606 Network table 6 status 60 Network table status 60 Network table status 609 Network table 9 status 60 Network table 90 status 6 Network table 9 status 6 Network table 9 status 6 Network table 9 status 64 Network table 94 status 6 Network table 9 status 66 Network table 96 status 6 Network table 9 status 6 Network table 9 status 69 Network table 99 status Contents

284 Appendix Ethernet App- Addresses $s4, These addresses are related to macro commands [SEND], [EREAD] and [EWRITE]. $s4: Sets the executing status of the macro. In the case of 0, the next step of the macro is executed without waiting for the completion of the command when a command request is given to the Ethernet. In the case of other than 0, the wait status continues until the command completes, and then the next step of the macro is executed. * If the same port is accessed for execution of commands on one macro sheet, set a value other than 0. If 0 is set, the macro command executed next is deleted. $s: Stores the result of macro execution. An error occurs if a value other than 0 is stored. For more information, refer to the error codes (page App-44). However, when $s4 is 0, the data before the command request is stored. $s Stores the current status of the Ethernet. An error occurs if a value other than 0 is stored. For more information, refer to the error codes (page App-4). $s0 to 69 Stores the statuses of network table No. 0 to Network table use status Not used Macro command execution status Command execution status Command execution result - Bit 0 (Network table use status) [0]: Not used []: Used For the current station, 0 (not used) is input. - Bit (Macro command execution status) Stores the execution status of macro command [SEND], [EREAD] or [EWRITE]. [0]: Waiting []: Executing - Bit (Command execution status) Stores the execution status of the command from the server or other station. [0]: Waiting []: Executing (read/write command) - Bit (Macro command execution result) Stores the execution result of macro command [SEND], [EREAD] or [EWRITE]. [0]: Normal []: Error - Bits 4 to (System reserved) Not used at present. Always set 0.

285 App- Appendix Ethernet Ethernet Access Functions (HKEtn0.DLL) To enable Ethernet communications between the server and the V series, it is necessary to create an application based on HKEtn0.dll (for UDP/IP) provided by us, using Visual C++, Visual Basic, etc. Sample Folder The Sample folder for Ethernet communications is included in the V-SFT CD-ROM. The [Ethernet] folder contains sample programs created using Visual C++, and the [VBA] folder contains those created using VBA. Refer to these sample program when creating an application. If necessary, you can copy and tailor the program to your requirements. V-SFT CD-ROM Sample Eng Jpn Ethernet VBA Release Res Ethernet The following files are contained in the respective folders. [Ethernet] - ESmpl.dsp - ESmpl.h - ESmpl.cpp - ESmpl.rc - ESmpl.clw - MainFrm.h - MainFrm.cpp - ESmplDoc.h - ESmplDoc.cpp - ESmplView.h - ESmplView.cpp - StdAfx.h - StdAfx.cpp - Resource.h - ReadMe.txt - HKEtn0.h [Release] - HKEtn0.dll - HKEtn0.lib [res] - ESmpl.ico - ESmpl.rc - Toolbar.bmp - ESmplDoc.ico VBA The following files are contained in this folder. [VBA] - HKEtn0.dll - VBA_Sample.xls * To execute this program, copy the above files to the C:\TEST folder. Port No is set. When changing the copy target or the port number, change the setting in the program accordingly.

286 Appendix Ethernet App-9 Notes on use of the sample programs The data type to be set when creating a program varies depending on whether Visual C++ or Visual Basic is used. For the data type and range, refer to the following tables. Visual C++ BYTE short unsigned short WORD int long DWORD char VB Byte Integer Long String Visual C++ Data Type Bytes Data Range BYTE 0 to short 6 to 6 unsigned short 0 to 6 WORD to 4464 int to 4464 long 0 to 6 DWORD 4 0 to char to Visual Basic Data Type Bytes Data Range Byte 0 to Boolean TRUE(0) / FALSE( ) Integer 6 to 6 Long to 4464 Double 4.94E 4 to.9e+0 String Variable 0 to GB

287 App-0 Appendix Ethernet Function Specifications List Read PLC Memory Word PLC memory Double-word Internal memory Word Memory card memory Word PLC memory Bit Internal memory Bit Memory card memory Bit int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory(WORD *dp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory(DWORD *dp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) int HKEtn_ReadInternalMemory(WORD *dp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) int HKEtn_ReadCardMemory(WORD *dp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int FileNo,int RecordNo,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) int HKEtn_ReadPlcBitMemory(int *lponflag,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,int BitNo,char *lpaddr) int HKEtn_ReadInternalBitMemory(int *lponflag,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,int BitNo,char *lpaddr) int HKEtn_ReadCardBitMemory(int *lponflag,int FileNo,int RecordNo,DWORD addr,int BitNo,char *lpaddr) Page App- Page App- Page App- Page App-4 Write PLC memory Word PLC memory Double-word Internal memory Word Memory card memory Word PLC memory Bit Internal memory Bit Memory card memory Bit int HKEtn_WritePlcMemory(WORD *sp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) int HKEtn_WritePlcMemory(DWORD *sp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) int HKEtn_WriteInternalMemory(WORD *sp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) int HKEtn_WriteCardMemory(WORD *sp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int FileNo,int RecordNo,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) int HKEtn_WritePlcBitMemory(int DeviceType,DWORD addr,int BitNo,int OnFlag,char *lpaddr) int HKEtn_WriteInternalBitMemory(int DeviceType,DWORD addr,int BitNo,int OnFlag,char *lpaddr) int HKEtn_WriteCardBitMemory(int FileNo,int RecordNo,DWORD addr,int BitNo,int OnFlag,char *lpaddr) Page App- Page App-6 Page App- Page App- Others Initialization function Receive wait from V Cancel receive wait function int HKEtn_Init(unsigned short Port=0000,int Retry=,int RecvTime=,int RecvTime=0) int HKEtn_Recvfrom(BYTE *dp,short *lpcnt) void HKEtn_Cancel(void) Page App- Request connection int HKEtn_GetInf(struct inf *lpinf,char *lpaddr) information Page App-9 Close processing int HKEtn_Close() Get source s IP address int HKEtn_GetSinAddr(char *lpaddr) Get error contents int HKEtn_GetLastError() Page App-40

288 Appendix Ethernet App- Read Read Words from PLC Memory int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory(WORD *dp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr, int DFlag=) This function is retained until PLC data is transferred from the V series. Parameters *dp Target pointer of the data to be read Contents Word Count No. No. No. n Wordcnt Word count to be read (max. 000 words) DeviceType Address of the device to be read (Refer to Chapter to Chapter. ) addr Top memory address to be read * For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs, specify a number for the address (addr). Example: D D 4 *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX DFlag 0,, (Refer to the table below.) Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). Priority and communication procedure depending on the DFlag setting are shown below. DFlag Priority Communication Procedure 0 Communications PC Read/write request V PLC Memory card Response Display Acknowledge of completion Response Display PC Read/write request V PLC Memory card Acknowledge of completion

289 App- Appendix Ethernet Read Double-words from PLC Memory int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory(DWORD *dp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr, int DFlag=) This function is retained until PLC data is transferred from the V series. Parameters *dp Target pointer of the data to be read Contents Word Count No. No. No. n Wordcnt Word count to be read (max. 000 words) DeviceType Address of the device to be read (Refer to Chapter to Chapter. ) addr Top memory address to be read * For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs, specify a number for the address (addr). Example: D D 4 *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX DFlag 0,, (Refer to page App-.) Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). Read Words from Internal Memory int HKEtn_ReadInternalMemory(WORD *dp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) This function is retained until data is transferred from the V series. Parameters *dp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No. No. Wordcnt Word count to be transferred (max. 000 words) DeviceType 0: $u : $s : $L : $LD 4: $T addr Top memory address to be read *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX DFlag 0,, (Refer to page App-.) Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). No. n

290 Appendix Ethernet App- Read Words from Memory Card Memory int HKEtn_ReadCardMemory(WORD *dp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int FileNo,int RecordNo,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) This function is retained until data is transferred from the V series. Parameters *dp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No. No. Wordcnt Word count to be transferred (max. 000 words) FileNo File number RecordNo record number addr Top memory address to be read *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX DFlag 0,, (Refer to page App-.) Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). No. n Read Bits from PLC Memory int HKEtn_ReadPlcBitMemory(int *lponflag,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,int BitNo,char *lpaddr) This function is retained until PLC data is transferred from the V series. Parameters *IpOnFlag Returns the bit status. 0: OFF : ON DeviceType Address of the device to be read (Refer to Chapter to Chapter. ) addr Top memory address to be read * For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs, specify a number for the address (addr). Example: D D 4 BitNo Bit number to be read Example : When accessing to D0-0 of MITSUBISHI PLC DeviceType 0 addr 0 BitNo Example : When accessing to M0 of MITSUBISHI PLC 0 6 =... 4 DeviceType 6 addr BitNo 4 *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError ().

291 App-4 Appendix Ethernet Read Bits from Internal Memory int HKEtn_ReadInternalBitMemory(int *lponflag,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,int BitNo,char *lpaddr) This function is retained until data is transferred from the V series. Parameters *IpOnFlag Returns the bit status. 0: OFF : ON DeviceType 0: $u : $s : $L : $LD 4: $T addr Top memory address to be read BitNo Bit number to be read *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). Read Bits from Memory Card Memory int HKEtn_ReadCardBitMemory(int *lponflag,int FileNo,int RecordNo,DWORDaddr,int BitNo,char *lpaddr) This function is retained until data is transferred from the V series. Parameters *IpOnFlag Returns the bit status. 0: OFF : ON FileNo File number RecordNo Record number addr Top memory address to be read BitNo Bit number to be read *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError ().

292 Appendix Ethernet App- Write Write Words to PLC Memory int HKEtn_WritePlcMemory(WORD *sp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr, int DFlag=) This function is retained until write completion is received from the V series. (It is reset on receipt of write completion to the PLC memory.) Parameters *sp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No. No. Wordcnt Word count to be transferred (max. 000 words) DeviceType Address of the device to be written (Refer to Chapter to Chapter. ) addr Top memory address to be written * For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs, specify a number for the address (addr). Example: D D 4 *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX DFlag 0,, (Refer to page App-.) Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). No. n

293 App-6 Appendix Ethernet Write Double-words to PLC Memory int HKEtn_WritePlcMemory(DWORD *sp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr, int DFlag=) This function is retained until write completion is received from the V series. (It is reset on receipt of write completion to the PLC memory.) Parameters *sp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No. No. No. n Wordcnt Word count to be transferred (max. 000 words) DeviceType Address of the device to be written (Refer to Chapter to Chapter. ) addr Top memory address to be written * For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs, specify a number for the address (addr). Example: D D 4 *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX DFlag 0,, (Refer to page App-.) Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). Write Words to Internal Memory int HKEtn_WriteInternalMemory(WORD *sp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int DeviceType,DWORD addr,chr *lpaddr,int DFlag=) This function is retained until write completion is received from the V series. (It is reset on receipt of write completion to the internal memory.) Parameters *sp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No. No. Wordcnt Word count to be transferred (max. 000 words) DeviceType 0: $u : $s : $L : $LD 4: $T addr Top memory address to be written *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX DFlag 0,, (Refer to page App-.) Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). No. n

294 Appendix Ethernet App- Write Words to Memory Card Memory int HKEtn_WriteCardMemory(WORD *sp,unsigned short Wordcnt,int FileNo,int RecordNo,DWORD addr,char *lpaddr,int DFlag=) This function is retained until write completion is received from the V series. (It is reset on receipt of write completion to the memory card memory.) Parameters *sp Target block pointer Contents Word Count No. No. Wordcnt Word count to be transferred (max. 000 words) FileNo File number RecordNo Record number addr Top memory address to be written *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX DFlag 0,, (Refer to page App-.) Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). No. n Write Bits to PLC Memory int HKEtn_WritePlcBitMemory(int DeviceType,DWORD addr,int BitNo,int OnFlag,char *lpaddr) This function is retained until write completion is received from the V series. (It is reset on receipt of write completion to the PLC memory.) Parameters DeviceType Address of the device to be written (Refer to Chapter to Chapter. ) addr Top memory address to be written * For YOKOGAWA or YASKAWA PLCs, specify a number for the address (addr). Example: D D 4 BitNo Bit number to be accessed Example : When accessing to D0-0 of MITSUBISHI PLC DeviceType 0 addr 0 BitNo Example : When accessing to M0 of MITSUBISHI PLC 0 6 =... 4 DeviceType 6 addr BitNo 4 OnFlag 0: OFF : ON *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError ().

295 App- Appendix Ethernet Write Bits to Internal Memory int HKEtn_WriteInternalBitMemory(int DeviceType,DWORD addr,int BitNo,int OnFlag,char *lpaddr) This function is retained until write completion is received from the V series. (It is reset on receipt of write completion to the internal memory.) Parameters DeviceType 0: $u : $s : $L : $LD 4: $T addr Top memory address to be written BitNo Bit number to be accessed OnFlag 0: OFF : ON *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). Write Bits to Memory Card Memory int HKEtn_WriteCardBitMemory(int FileNo,int RecordNo,DWORD addr,int BitNo,int OnFlag,char *lpaddr) This function is retained until write completion is received from the V series. (It is reset on receipt of write completion to the memory card memory.) Parameters FileNo File number RecordNo Record number addr Top memory address to be written BitNo Bit number to be accessed OnFlag 0: OFF : ON *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). Others Functions Initialization Function int HKEtn_Init(unsigned short Port=0000,int Retry=,int RecvTime=,int RecvTime=0) Creates a socket. Parameters Port Set 0000 or above. Retry Number of send retrials * RecvTime Receive timeout * RecvTime Receive timeout * When HKEtn_Recvfrom() is used, the time for [RecvTime] is used for timeout judgment. * When HKEtn_Readxxx or HKEtn_Writexxx is used, both the times for [RecvTime] and [RecvTime] are used for timeout judgment. Total time for timeout = [RecvTime] x [RecvTime] x [Retry] (seconds) Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError ().

296 Appendix Ethernet App-9 Receive Wait from V int HKEtn_Recvfrom(BYTE *dp,short *lpcnt) This function is retained internally until data is received from the V series. The function returns a response and ends only when a command is received. The user should interpret the received data and create the next action. This function must be executed within the thread. Parameters *dp Top pointer of receive buffer Allocate 000 bytes. *lpcnt Returns the number of bytes received. Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). Cancel Receive Wait Function void HKEtn_Cancel(void) Cancels the function in the receive wait status, such as Recvfrom(). Request Connection Information int HKEtn_GetInf(struct inf *lpinf,char *lpaddr) Parameters *Ipinf All 0 *lpaddr IP address shown as a string of characters separated by dots Example: 9.6.XXX.XXX Return values Success TRUE Failure FALSE Error details Get using HKEtn_GetLastError (). Close Processing int HKEtn_Close() Execute this function when ending HKEtn0.dll. Get Source s IP Address int HKEtn_GetSinAddr(char *lpaddr) Execute this function after the recvfrom() function or receiving the data.

297 App-40 Appendix Ethernet Get Error Contents int HKEtn_GetLastError() Error codes and solutions Code Contents Solution Undefined command (receive timeout) Check the command. Undefined IP address Check the IP address. Target station busy Reduce the frequency of communications. 4 Illegal packet bytes Check response processing at the target station. Packet bytes exceed the maximum number. Reduce the send packet size. 6 Local mode error Check that the target station is in the RUN mode. Preparing for communications Start communications when the target station is ready. Communication failure Cannot access Check the target station. 9 Cannot process due to short memory Check the memory space at the target station. 0 Illegal received data Check the command. 0 Socket initialization error Check parameters for initialization. 0 Requested packet byte exceeds the maximum number. Reduce the requested size. Address error Check the requested memory type. Communication failure Cannot access Check the target station. 4 Write protected Check write-protection of the card. Cannot process due to short memory Check the memory space at the target station. 6 Sampling buffer error Check the command. 00 Processing another command Continue retrying. 0 Command control Buffer over Reduce the frequency of communications. 0 Communications aborted by the user Communications are forcibly aborted. Received during command processing Reduce the frequency of communications.

298 Appendix Ethernet App-4 Server Communication Procedure Data Request from V to Server () Execute the receive wait thread using int HKEtn_RecvFrom() on the application of the server. () Send the command from the V series to the server using macro command SEND. () The server analyzes the command and takes the appropriate action. () () Server Application User data format Transfer from the V series () Ethernet Item Bytes SEND V series Packet bytes +++n () Transaction No. Command (0x) User data n PLC PLC Data Request from Server to V () A request is sent from the application of the server to the V series. Use int HKEtn_ReadPlcMemory() for a memory request. () () The V series reads the PLC memory. (4) The V series returns data read from the PLC memory to the server. () Server Application (4) Ethernet V series () () PLC

299 App-4 Appendix Ethernet Error Display Error messages displayed on the V series and those stored in the system memory are explained. Communication Errors The Ethernet status is stored in system memory address $s of the V series during Ethernet communications The communication error occurs when a code other than 0 (normal) is stored in system memory address $s. In the RUN mode Communication Error Ethernet Error:XXXX * When [Continue] is selected for [Comm. Err. Handling] in the [Detail] tab window of the [Comm. Parameter] dialog, a following screen is displayed. Screen No. : Received Code No. : Retry Communication Error Ethernet Error:XXXX The error number is displayed here. To check the occurrence of an error on the Main Menu screen: Main Menu V0iTD ::0 System Information SYSTEM PROG. VER..00 Screen Data Information Size : Editor:MJ FONT VER..00 /.000 /.000 ENGLISH PLC Type : YOKOGAWAFA-M/FA-MR(Ethernet) Comment : Ethernet Information Trans.Speed : 0BASE-T Stat. No. : PORT: 0000 MAC: 000FF0000 I/F DRV VER..0 YOKOGAWA FA-M Ethernet Error : Stop Time-Out : 0.0 sec Retry : SRAM/Clock Ethernet Card Menu I/O Test Ethernet Information Trans.Speed : 0BASE-T Stat. No. : PORT: 0000 MAC: 000FF0000 Error:XXX The error number is displayed here. The error number is displayed here.

300 Appendix Ethernet App-4 System memory: $s No. Contents Solution 0 Normal 00 Failed in send request Check cable connection and network table setting of the target station. 0 Send error Check that the setting on the target station is consistent with the network table setting. 0 Internal port error The communication unit is in the older version or is faulty. 04 TCP connection over The number of connections reaches the maximum, and no more connection is possible. Check the communication lines. 0 TCP connection error Connection cannot be established. Check the communication lines, or turn the power off and on. 06 TCP connection end error TCP communication disconnection has failed. Check that the communication partner with the V series is present on the line. 0 TCP send error TCP communication has failed. Check the communication lines. 0 Send buffer full The line is busy. Consult the network administrator IC receive buffer overflow of your company. The communication unit is in the older version or is Driver receive buffer overflow faulty. 0 Receive processing error Link down error Check the HUB or the link confirmation LED on the communication unit. If the LED is not on, check cable connection and the port setting on the network table. 0 Transceiver error Check the transceiver and cable connection No IP address at local port Duplicated IP address error Check that the IP address of the local port is set on the network table. Check if the same IP address is set on the network. 90 Send socket ID error (error that may occur when Vi LAN port is used) 000 Ethernet I/F unit not mounted 00 Ethernet I/F unit not ready 00 Ethernet I/F unit DPRAM error 00 No response from Ethernet I/F unit 004 Ethernet receive buffer over 00 Ethernet send registration error 006 I/F unit unregistered interrupt 00 to Initialization error (communication unit) 0 Dual port access error 00 Undefined register 0 Send/receive buffer area over 0 MAC address error 0 Port error 0 Watch dog overflow 0 JAVA error LANC error Turn the power off and back it on. If the problem persists, contact your local distributor. Check whether the Ethernet I/F unit is mounted correctly, and then turn the power off and on. If the problem persists, contact your local distributor. Check whether the Ethernet I/F unit is mounted correctly, and then turn the power off and on. If the problem persists, contact your local distributor.

301 App-44 Appendix Ethernet Errors during Macro Command Execution The execution result of macro commands SEND/EREAD/EWRITE is stored in system memory address $s. System memory address: $s (response to the request) Code Contents Solution 0 Normal 00 to 000 Communication error Refer to Communication Errors. 0 Timeout Check if an error is occurring to the target V. The number of words being sent exceeds the limit. Check the number of words that can be sent in macro editing. Specified table not used Check the setting on the network table. Cannot use the send command. Check the macro command in macro editing. 4 Specified table being used Check that system memory address $s4 is set. If not, reduce the frequency of communications. Cannot process due to short memory Check the memory space at the target station. 6 Illegal receive packet bytes Check the requested number of words. Memory access error Check the setting of the requested memory. Macro setting error Check the macro setting.

302 disc RESET Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Interface Outline of Communication V series internal user memory V series Screen No. 0 General-purpose computer (ON) Dedicated commands Read Write Screen No As shown in the diagram above, when a general-purpose computer communicates with the V series, the general-purpose computer acts as the host and the V series acts as the slave. Switch, lamp, data display, etc., are allocated within the internal user memory ($u). When a screen number is specified from the host, a write action takes place to the internal memory address specified for the screen, and the specified screen is then displayed on the V series. When a screen is changed internally by a switch, etc., the changed screen number is read, and written in the memory specified for the screen.

303 App6- Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Differences between Connecting to a General-purpose Computer and Connecting to the PLC Input format (code) The input format used for screen number, block number, message number, etc, is fixed in [DEC]. Write area When connecting to the PLC, only the three words shaded in the diagram below are used, but when connecting to a general-purpose computer, all 6 words shown below are used. Address Contents n+0 CFMDAT Sub command/data n+ SCRN_COM Screen status n + SCRN_No Displayed screen n + SW0 No. 0 switch data n + 4 SW No. switch data n + ENT0 Entry information 0 n + 6 ENT Entry information n + ENT Entry information n + GREPNS Global response n+9 n+ Reserved ( words)

304 disc RESET Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Memory settings (for lamp, data display, etc.) are required during screen creation, and the memory addresses are mapped as shown below. The memory addresses are $u0 to 6. Assign memory addresses for system, lamp, data display, and mode within this range. 0 V series internal user memory ($u) V series screen data Screen No General-purpose computer Dedicated commands Read Write Screen No Word (6 bits)

305 disc disc RESET RESET App6-4 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications System Composition : connection (one computer, one V series unit) (For wiring, refer to page App6-6 to page App6-6.) The system composition for a : connection is shown. ) Can be used when the transmission distance via RS-C is within m, or the transmission distance of RS-4 (4) is not greater than 00 m. ) It is possible to use an interrupt when connecting a computer to a V series unit in a : connection. * (Switch ON/OFF, ENT key of keypad, screen changing, macro OUT_ENQ) * For RS-4 (4) -wire connection, interrupts cannot be used. General-purpose computer V series : Connection RS-C RS-4 : n connection (one computer, multiple V series units) (A maximum of V series units can be connected. For wiring, refer to page App6-.) The system composition for a : n connection is shown. ) A station number specification is necessary to determine which V series will receive a command when a computer and V series units are : n connected. ) Interrupt cannot be used when a computer and V series units are : n connected. General-purpose computer : n Connection RS-4 V series V series V series * When V series units are : n connected, it is convenient to use the TC4 (Terminal Converter, optional). (For more information, refer to TC4 (Terminal Converter) Operation Instructions.)

306 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Input/Output Connector The connection method for communication between a general-purpose personal computer and a V series unit is shown in the diagram below. For V series: Generalpurpose computer RS4 V series RSC CN For V06 + DU-0: Generalpurpose computer RS4 DU-0 V06 RSC CN For V06: Generalpurpose computer V06 RS4 RSC MJ

307 App6-6 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Wiring Connect the shielded cable either to the V series or PLC side. This connection diagram shows the case where the shielded cable is connected on the V series side. When connecting the shielded cable to the V series side, connect it to pin of the connector or the connector case cover. The metal shell of modular jack on the V06 is used as. Connect the shielded cable to the metal shell of modular jack. For the specifications of CN and MJ (V06), refer to Interface (page -). CN - RS-C V series (CN) General-purpose computer D-sub 9-pin FG FG SD RD RD SD RS 4 RS CS CS * Use twist-shielded cables. <Executing Flow Control> V series (CN) General-purpose computer D-sub 9-pin FG FG SD RD RD SD RS 4 RS CS CS * Use twist-shielded cables.

308 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- CN - RS-4 : Connection <4-wire system> V series (CN) FG +SD General-purpose computer FG RDA SD +RD RD 4 RDB SDA SDB * Use twist-shielded cables. <-wire system> V series (CN) FG +SD General-purpose computer FG RDA SD +RD 4 RDB SDA RD SDB * Use twist-shielded cables. * Use TC4 (Terminal Converter, optional) when V series is connected on the terminal block. (For more information, refer to the TC4 (Terminal Converter) Operation Instructions. <Executing Flow Control> TC4 can not be used. V series (CN) General-purpose computer FG +SD SD CS +CS +RD RD 9 4 FG RDA RDB RSB RSA SDA SDB * Use twist-shielded cables.

309 App6- Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications V+TC4 (SW: Lower) FG +SD SD +RD RD : n Connection <-wire system> - When TC4 is used: V+TC4 (SW: Lower) FG +SD SD +RD RD V+TC4 (SW: Lower) FG +SD SD +RD RD General-purpose computer FG RDA RDB SDA SDB Terminating resistance (ON) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (OFF) - When TC4 is not used: Install jumpers between +RD/+SD and RD/ SD. <4-wire system> * Use twist-shielded cables. V+TC4 (SW: Upper) V+TC4 (SW: Upper) V+TC4 (SW: Upper) General-purpose computer FG FG FG FG +SD +SD +SD RDA SD SD SD RDB +RD +RD +RD SDA RD RD RD SDB Terminating resistance (ON) Terminating resistance (OFF) Terminating resistance (OFF) * Use twist-shielded cables. MJ (V06 only) RS-C CAUTION To use an MJ on a V06 as an RS-C/RS-4 connector, set the slide switch on the V06 to the upper position: RS-C/RS-4. For more information, refer to Interface (page -). V06 (MJ) General-purpose computer D-sub 9-pin SHELL FG SD RD RD SD RS CS * Use twist-shielded cables.

310 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6-9 MJ (V06 only) RS-4 CAUTION To use an MJ on a V06 as an RS-4 (4-wire) connector, set the slide switch on the V06 to the lower position: RS-4. For more information, refer to Interface (page -). : Connection V06 (MJ) General-purpose computer +SD SD +RD RD SHELL FG RDA RDB SDA SDB * Use twist-shielded cables. : n Connection V06 (MJ) +SD +SD General-purpose computer FG RDA Terminating resistance (OFF) -SD +RD -SD +RD RDB SDA -RD -RD SDB V06 (MJ) +SD +SD Terminating resistance (OFF) -SD +RD -SD +RD -RD -RD V06 (MJ) +SD +SD Terminating resistance (ON) -SD +RD -SD +RD -RD -RD * Use twist-shielded cables.

311 App6-0 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications MJ (V06 only) RS-4 CAUTION To use an MJ on a V06 as an RS-4 (-wire) connector, set the slide switch on the V06 to the upper position: RS-C/RS-4. For more information, refer to Interface (page -). : Connection V06 (MJ) General-purpose computer +SD SD +RD RD SHELL FG RDA RDB SDA SDB * Use twist-shielded cables. : n Connection General-purpose computer V06 (MJ) FG +SD +SD RDA Terminating resistance (OFF) -SD +RD -SD +RD RDB SDA -RD -RD SDB V06 (MJ) +SD +SD Terminating resistance (OFF) -SD +RD -SD +RD -RD -RD V06 (MJ) +SD +SD Terminating resistance (ON) -SD +RD -SD +RD -RD -RD * Use twist-shielded cables.

312 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- System Setting Model Setting Select universal serial as the model that will communicate with the V series. ) From the menu bar, go to [System Setting] and click on [PLC Type]. ) The [Select PLC Type] dialog comes up. Select [Universal Serial] and click the [OK] button. Communication Parameter Make communication parameter settings.. From the menu bar, go to [System Setting], and click on [Comm. Parameter].. The [Comm. Parameter] dialog comes up. In the [Main ], [Main ], and [Detail] tab windows, set the baud rate, the signal level, etc. When using multi-drop, go to the [Detail] tab window, check [ : n] for [Connection], and enter [Local No]. It is possible to set the transmission mode by going to the [Detail] tab window and making settings for [Trans. Mode].

313 App6- Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Setting Items Baud Rate Set the communication speed between the host and the V series. The possible speed settings are shown below. 400 bps 9600 bps 900 bps 400 bps 600 bps 600 bps kbps Level Set the communication level between the host and the V series. RS-C/RS-4 Read Area This memory area is necessary when the display screen is changed by a command received from the host. Be sure to allocate only $u memory. Address allocation is shown in the table below. For details on addresses, refer to Chapter in the Reference Manual (Function). Address Contents n + 0 RCVDAT Sub command/data n + SCRN_COM Screen status command n + SCRN_No External screen command Write Area This memory area is used to write information regarding screen number, overlap, and input mode when the screen display status is changed by a command received from the host. Be sure to allocate only $u memory. Address allocation is shown in the table below. Address Contents n+0 CFMDAT Sub command/data n + SCRN_COM Screen status n+ SCRN_No Displayed screen n + SW0 No. 0 switch data n + 4 SW No. switch data n + ENT0 Entry information 0 n + 6 ENT Entry information n + ENT Entry information n + GREPNS Global response n+9 n+ Reserved ( words) For details on addresses (n + 0 to n + ), refer to Chapter in the Reference Manual (Function). - n + (SW0) switch data No. 0, n + 4 (SW) switch data No. When the switch output memory is set at an address location from 0 to 9 in the system memory ($s) of internal memory, the switch number is written on lower bits. The relationship between the switch number and the bit is shown in the following table. (Refer to page App6-6.) n+, n+4 (SW0/SW) Switch status 0: OFF : ON Switch number

314 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- - System memory ($s) within internal memory Address Contents 000 Screen number Overlap 0 Status 0: OFF : ON 00 Overlap Status 0: OFF : ON 004 Overlap Status 0: OFF : ON 00 Universal serial port switch output 0 Output code 0-0 Universal serial port switch output Output code 6-0 Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output 4 Output code Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output 6 Output code 96-0 Universal serial port switch output Output code - 0 Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output 9 Output code Universal serial port switch output 0 Output code Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output 4 Output code Universal serial port switch output Output code 40 - * The switch interrupt information of SW0 and SW is written only when the [Output Action] of a switch is [Momentary] or [Momentary W]. Example: The relationship between the switch output memory setting and the switch number is shown in the following table. Output Memory Switch No. $s $s $s n + (ENT0) entry information 0, n + 6 (ENT) entry information The same contents as n + 0 and n + of the [Info. Output Memory] that is set in the entry mode are written. Write operation occurs when the [ENTER] key is pressed in the entry mode. When the entry selection has changed, write operation will not occur. When (n + ) entry information 0 is read by the host, writing completed bit (bit ) is reset. Data is written in the backup (escape) area before it is read. (Refer to page App6-.)

315 App6-4 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications - n + (ENT) entry information The entry mode window number where a write operation was executed is written. The relationship between the window number and base and the window number and overlap is shown in the following table. Window No. Contents 0 Base entry mode Overlap 0 entry mode Overlap entry mode Overlap entry mode * In case of using the Table Data Display(s) as the entry targets of the Entry mode The line number and the column number will be output to the address n + and the block number to the address n + of the Info. Output Memory, when the bit No. of Command Memory in the [Entry] dialog is ON []. In only this case, therefore, the window number cannot be referred because the block number is output to the address n + (ENT) of the write area. Please take note of this. - n + (GREPNS) global response A response to a global command is written. The contents of a response are shown in the following table. Memory Contents Contents 0000 Global command not received 000 ACK Others Identical to NAK code (Refer to page App6-.) - n + 9 to n + Reserved for functions expanded in the future. Calendar The values written in the calendar area are used for the calendar display. Set the top memory number. The relationship between memory and the calendar is shown in the following table. Memory Contents n + 0 Year (BCD 0 to 99) n + Month (BCD to ) n + Day (BCD to ) n + Hour (BCD 0 to ) n + 4 Minute (BCD 0 to 9) n + Second (BCD 0 to 9) n + 6 Day of the week (BCD 0 to 6) Calendar settings are performed in the read area under [RCVDAT (n + 0)] at the leading edge of bit. The V series calendar uses the CPU clock. When precise time is necessary, set the calendar once a day. (Time loss: approximately 90 seconds a month.) Read Clear Top Address (Set user memory within internal memory.) The read clear area is the starting area from which the V series clears words that were previously read. Due to the fact that it is cleared to 0, once this area is read, the data remains at 0 even if you attempt to read again when a read response error occurs. Set the area s top address number. Read Clear Words Set the number of words that will be used for clearing the read area.

316 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Read Clear Escape (Backup) Address Set the top address for the read clear backup area. The area size will be the same as the previously described read clear area. The number of words written in the read clear backup area are the same as the number specified for the read clear area. - Read Clear and Read Clear Backup Action The action that occurs when a read command from the host tries to access to the read clear area is shown in the following diagram. Following allocation of the read clear backup area, backup data of the system memory write area is stored as shown below. Read command Data transmission to the specified address Address is in the read clear area. YES Data is copied to the read clear backup area. NO Data clear Address + NO Transmission word transmission Finish YES n+0 Read clear backup area Backup words CFMDAT SCRN_COM SCRN_No SW0 SW ENT0 ENT ENT GREPNS Reserved ( words) Default Initial Screen Set the number of the screen to be displayed when power to the V series is turned on.

317 App6-6 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Interrupt There are five interrupt settings: Switch ON interrupt Switch OFF interrupt Keypad interrupt Screen interrupt Macro: OUT_ENQ For details, refer to page App6-4. Execute Flow Control (disabled for V06) Check the [Execute Flow Control] when interrupt from V series is needed to be prohibited. (e.g. when the host cannot receive interrupt data) The action when you check the [Execute Flow Control] is shown below. - When CS (pin 4) on V series side is ON: Interruption is output. - When CS (pin 4) on V series side is OFF: Interruption is not output. When CS is ON, interruption information stored by then is output in succession. (Interruption information for times can be stored at the most.) Not remain the output signal OFF This setting is available only for : communication with RS4 using four-wire. Normally, V series uses the same cables to send or receive data. For this reason, send output remains OFF (High impedance) except for sending signals from V series. However, depending on the host specifications, send output OFF operation from the V series is not required. In this case, you must check [ Not remain the output signal OFF]. Execute Wire Control This setting is available only for : communication with RS-4 using -wire. In such a case, however, interrupt is not usable. Connection Set the connection method for the V series and host. :... There is one V series machine and one host. : n... Multiple V series units are connected to one host. Local Station Number When multiple V series machines are connected to one host, set a station number for each V series. Parity None Odd Even Send Delay Time Set the time for V series to send a response to a host after receiving a command from a host. Busy Time For details, refer to page App6-. Trans. Mode Set whether or not there should be a CR/LF or sum check at the end of transmission data. Data Length Fixed at bits. Stop Bit Stop bit settings are shown below. bit bits Code Fixed at DEC.

318 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Text Process When using text process, choose either [LSB to MSB] or [MSB to LSB] in order to make arrangements for the order of the first and the second bytes in one word. 0 [LSB MSB] MSB LSB nd byte st byte 0 [MSB LSB] MSB LSB st byte nd byte Standard Type Protocol Standard Type Protocol The connection mode and transmission mode are set in [Comm. Parameters] under [System Setting]. (Refer to. Before Connecting to PLC. ) The mode contents are as follows. Connection mode : : Used when one host communicates with one V series unit ( : ). : n: A maximum of V series units are possible to be connected to the host. (Multi-drop specifications) Transmission mode There are four transmission modes, depending on whether or not sum check or CR/LF is attached to the end of transmission and received data, as shown below. Transmission Mode Sum Check CR/LF 4 Set whether or not to attach sum check or CR/LF to the end of transmission data. * indicates that there is an attachment.

319 POWER POWER RUN RUN SYSTEM F F F F 4 F F 6 F SYSTEM F F F F 4 F F 6 F App6- Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Connection ( : ), Transmission Mode (w/ sum check) Used when one host communicates with one V series unit ( : ). Contents Protocol Host side V series side S T X C o m m a n d HL D L E Transmission data Part A D L E Transmission data Part B E T X S U M HL When V series data is read from the host side Transmission sequence S T X D L E Transmission data Part A D L E Transmission data Part B E S T U X M HL or N Error A K code HL Host side V series side S T X C o m m a n d HL D L E Transmission data Part A D L E Transmission data Part B E T X S U M HL When the host writes data on the V series Transmission sequence A C K or N Error A K code HL

320 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6-9 <Interrupt Processing (See page App6-4 and page App6-.)> Interrupt conditions An interrupt code is sent to the host for the following actions. - When the switch status changes from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON - When the [ENTER] switch on the keypad changes from OFF to ON. (If [ Use the Write Flag] in [System Setting] is checked, write enable bit must be set in order to send interruption.) - When the screen changes by using an internal switch - When OUT_ENQ in a macro command is run. Interrupt timing When an interrupt condition occurs while the host is transmitting a command or before the V series machine transmits a response, the interrupt code will be transmitted before the response is transmitted. To use an interrupt, it is necessary to enable interrupt code detection when a response is received on the host program. Command Host side (command) V series side E N Q Interrupt code DATA C R L F HL Interrupt occurrence Interrupt Interrupt data Response Interrupt code 00H 0H 0H 0H FH When a regular switch is pressed When the [ENTER] switch on the keypad is pressed When a screen internal switching occurs In the case of macro command (user setting)

321 POWER RUN POWER RUN SYSTEM F F F F 4 F F 6 F SYSTEM F F F F 4 F F 6 F App6-0 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Connection ( : ), Transmission Mode (w/ sum check and CR/LF) Used when one host communicates with one V series unit ( : ). Contents Protocol When V series data is read from the host side Host side V series side S T X C o m m a n d HL D L E Transmission data Part A Transmission sequence D L E Transmission data Part B E T X S C U R M HL L F S T X D L E Transmission data Part A D L E Transmission data Part B E T X S U M C R L F HL or N A K Error code C R L F HL S T X Host side V series side C o D m m L an E d HL Transmission data Part A D L E Transmission data Part B E T X S C U R M HL L F When the host writes data on the V series Transmission sequence A C K C R L F or N Error C A R K code L F HL

322 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- <Interrupt Processing (See page App6-4 and page App6-.)> Interrupt conditions An interrupt code is sent to the host for the following actions. - When the switch status changes from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON - When the [ENTER] switch on the keypad changes from OFF to ON. (If [ Use the Write Flag] in [System Setting] is checked, write enable bit must be set in order to send interruption.) - When the screen changes by using an internal switch - When OUT_ENQ in a macro command is run. Interrupt timing When an interrupt condition occurs while the host is transmitting a command or before the V series machine transmits a response, the interrupt code will be transmitted before the response is transmitted. To use an interrupt, it is necessary to enable interrupt code detection when a response is received on the host program. Command Host side (command) V series side E N Q Interrupt code DATA C R L F HL Interrupt occurrence Interrupt Interrupt data Response Interrupt code 00H 0H 0H 0H FH When a regular switch is pressed When the [ENTER] switch on the keypad is pressed When a screen internal switching occurs In the case of macro command (user setting)

323 POWER POWER RUN RUN SYSTEM F F F F 4 F F 6 F SYSTEM F F F F 4 F F 6 F App6- Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Connection ( : n), Transmission Mode (w/ sum check) It is possible to attach as many as V series units to one host. (For information on the global command, refer to page App6-6.) Contents Protocol When V series data is read from the host side S C ta S o D t m Transmission T i m o L data n a X n E Part A N d o. Host side HL HL V series side Transmission sequence D L E Transmission data Part B E S T U X M HL or S T X S ta t i o n N o. HL D L E Transmission data Part A D L E Transmission data Part B E S T U X M HL N A K S ta t i o n N o. HL Error code HL When the host writes data on the V series S C ta S o D t m T i m o L n an X E N d o. Host side HL HL V series side Transmission sequence Transmission data Part A D L E Transmission data Part B E S T U X M HL or A C K S ta t i o n N o. HL N A K S ta t i o n N o. HL Error code HL

324 POWER POWER RUN RUN SYSTEM F F F F 4 F F 6 F SYSTEM F F F F 4 F F 6 F Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Connection ( : n), Transmission Mode (w/ sum check and CR/LF) It is possible to attach as many as V series units to one host. (For information on the global command, refer to page App6-6.) Contents Protocol When V series data is read from the host side S C ta S o D t m Transmission T i m L data o n a X n E N Part A d o. Host side HL HL V series side Transmission sequence D L E Transmission data Part B E T X S C U R M HL L F S ta S D t i T o L n X N E o. HL Transmission data Part A D L E Transmission data Part B E S C T U R X M HL L F or S ta N t Error i C A o n R K code N o. HL HL L F When the host writes data on the V series S C ta S o D t m Transmission T i m L data o n a X n E N Part A d o. Host side HL HL V series side Transmission sequence D L E E Transmission data T Part B X HL S C L U R F M or S ta A t i C o n K N o. HL C R L F S ta N t Error i C A o n R K code N o. HL HL L F

325 App6-4 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Data Items for Protocols Transmission control code The transmission control codes are shown in the table below. Code (Hexadecimal) Contents STX 0H Start of transmission block ETX 0H End of transmission block ENQ 0H Interrupt ACK 06H Positive acknowledge CR 0DH Carriage return DLE 0H Change contents within a block NAK H Negative acknowledge LF 0AH Line feed Port number Port numbers are used so that the host computer can identify each V series for access. The data range is from 00H to FH (0 to ) and is converted into two-digit ASCII code (HEX) before use. The port number of the V series should be set on the V-SFT editor. Sum check code (SUM) Data is added up (SUM), and the lower one byte ( bits) of the sum is converted into the -digit ASCII code (hexadecimal). A sum check code is shown below. Example: Sum check will be as is shown below when data is transmitted as: command [WM] (data writing), address [0AD] (4), and memory data [OFA] () in transmission mode [w/o CR/LF, w/ sum check]. STX Command DLE Address Count Memory data ETX SUM "W" "M" "0" "" "A" "D" "0" "0" "0" "" "0" "F" "" "A" "4" "D" 0H H 4DH 0H 0H H 4H 44H 0H 0H 0H H 0H 46H H 4H 0H 4H 44H 0H + H + 4DH + 0H + 0H + H + 4H + 44H + 0H + 0H + 0H + H + 0H + 46H + H + 4H + 0H = 4DH However, in the case of an interrupt, data from ENQ to ETX is subject to a sum check. Error code An error code is sent along with an NAK response. An error code is transmitted as a two-digit ASCII code (HEX). For more information, refer to page App6-.

326 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Response Time and BUSY Response time varies depending on the type of command. RM / RI / RC These commands immediately send a response once receipt of data is complete. No NAK [0] (BUSY) signal is given. Host side (command) V series (Response) T T = 0 msec or less WM / TR / WI / WC Once receipt of data is complete, these commands first check the display status. If the display status is found to be complete, a response is sent and a command is executed. If the status is BUSY and the display is completed within the time set in [Busy Time], a response is sent. If the display is not completed within the specified time, an NAK [0] (BUSY) signal is sent. In this case, it is necessary to retransmit the command. When [Busy Time] is set as [0], the machine waits until the display is complete, and then a response is transmitted after a command is executed. Host side (command) V series (Response) T T = [Busy Time] + 0 msec or less Command Command Available commands are shown below. Contents RM Read Read data memory WM Write Write data memory TR Retry Retry when NAK [0] is BUSY WI Interrupt Setting Allow interrupt (Connection mode : ) RI Read Interrupt Status Read interrupt setting status (Connection mode : ) RC Read CHR Read data memory as characters WC Write CHR Write data memory as characters

327 App6-6 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Global Port Number (FFH) Active for connection mode ( : n). When the port number is set as [FFH] and a command is executed, all V series units that are connected send a response in reply to a command from the host. Commands for which global port number are active are shown below. If commands other than these are used, a command error will occur. Contents WM Write Write data memory WC Write CHR Write data memory as characters Responses to global port numbers are not transmitted to the host. However, responses are written in write area (n + ) as shown below. Memory Contents 0000H 000H Others Contents Global command not received ACK Identical to NAK code (See page App6-.)

328 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Read CHR Command When memory contents are in the form of characters when data is read, character ( byte) is converted into -byte ASCII code and transmitted. However, when this command is used, contents are not converted before transmission, and thus, the transmission time is decreased by approximately /. Read CHR command Read CHR command Host side S T X R C D L E A d d r e s s C o u n t D L E A d d r e s s C o u n t E T X S U M HL V series side Transmission data S T X D L E Memory data D L E Memory data E T X S U M HL Transmission data - Host side There should be no more than DLEs. Address: Top address of the data memory to be read (HEX ASCII) Count: Number of characters to be read (HEX ASCII) * When the data to be read is not continuous, DLE is inserted as a delimiter between the breaks. - V series side Address and count are omitted and DLE and data are transmitted. Example: Address: Call up 4 characters that are written at the top of 000 (004H). Host side V series side S D E T R C L T X E X 0H H4H 0H 0H 0H H 4H 0H 0H 0H 4H 0H HH The A, B, C, and D character codes are sent from the V series as shown below. S D E T L A B C D T F X E X 0H 0H 4H 4H 4H 44H 0H H46H Send data

329 App6- Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Read Memory Command Note: Due to the fact that communication speed is increased when you use the read CHR command to read characters, it is recommended that you use this command. Read memory command Read memory command Host side S T X R M D L E A d d r e s s C o u n t D L E A d d r e s s C o u n t E T X S U M HL V series side Transmission data S T X D L E Memory data D L E Memory data E T X S U M HL Transmission data - Host side There should be no more than DLEs. Address: Top address of the data memory to be read (HEX ASCII) Count: Number of characters to be read (HEX ASCII) * When the data to be read is not continuous, DLE is inserted as a delimiter between the breaks. - V series side Address: Top address of the data memory to be read (HEX ASCII) Count: Amount of data memory to be read (HEX ASCII) The read sequence is the same as the command sequence (HEX ASCII). Example: Address: Read the double-word data,000 (DEC) contained in the address 000 (004H). Host side V series side S D E T R M L T B X E X 0H H4DH 0H 0H0H H4H 0H0H 0HH 0H H4H Data is sent from the V series as shown below. S D T L X E,000 (DEC) = 000 4F (HEX) 4H FH 00H 0H E T X B A 0H 0H H4H 46H H 0H 0H 0H H 0H 4H4H

330 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6-9 Write CHR Command When memory contents are in the form of characters, it is necessary to use a write command to convert character ( byte) into byte ASCII code and then transmit. However, with this command contents are transmitted just as they are, and consequently, the transmission time is decreased by /. (Character codes from 00 to F cannot be used.) Write CHR command Write CHR command Host side S T X W C A D d C d Memory o L r u data e n E s t s WORD WORD A D d C d Memory E o L r u data T e n E s X t s WORD WORD S U M HL V series side Transmission data A C K - Host side There should be no more than DLEs. Address: Address of the memory to be written (HEX ASCII) Count: Number of write characters (HEX ASCII) Memory data: Data to be written * When write data is not continuous, DLE is inserted as a delimiter between the breaks. Example: Send data to display the following characters on the V series. Address: 000 (0064H), EF Address: 00 (006H), GH Address: 00 (0066H), IJ Address: 00 (006H), KL S T X D E W C L E F G H I J K L T E X Host side V series side 0H H4H 0H 0H 0H 6H 4H 0H 0H 0H H 4H 46H 4H 4H 49H 4AH 4BH 4CH 0H HH A C K

331 App6-0 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Write Memory Command Note: Due to the fact that communication speed is increased when you use the write CHR command to write characters, it is recommended that you use this command. Write memory command Write memory command Host side S T X W M D L E A d C d o r u e n s t s WORD WORD Memory D data L E A d C Memory E d o r u data T e n s X t s WORD WORD S U M HL V series side Transmission data A C K - Host side There should be no more than DLEs. Address: Address of the memory to be written (HEX ASCII) Count: Data memory contents to be written (HEX ASCII) * When write data is not continuous, DLE is inserted as a delimiter between the breaks. Example: Send data to display the following characters on the V series. Address: 000 (0064H), EF (= 464 H) Address: 00 (006H), GH (= 44 H) Address: 00 (0066H), IJ (= 4A49 H) Address: 00 (006H), KL (= 4C4B H) WM F E H G J I L K C 0 Host side 0H H 4DH 0H V series side 0H 0H 6H 4H 0H 0H 0H 4H 46H 4H 4H 4H 4AH 49H 4CH 4BH 4H 6H 4H H 4H H 4H H 4H 4H 4H 9H 4H 4H 4H 4H 0H 4H 0H

332 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Retry Command Use this command when a write command/write CHR command is sent and an NAK error code [0] is returned. Retry command Command A Retry command Host side S T X T R E T X S U M HL * Retry command re-sends the command A which is waiting. V series side A C K Error code 0H * In the case that error code [0] is returned, command A is on standby as the V series is currently engaged in display processing. Command A response

333 App6- Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Interrupt Setting Command Interrupt setting command Interrupt setting command Host side V series side S T X W I D E a T t a X HL S U M HL A C K - Host side Interrupt conditions can be specified when the interrupt data bit is set. DataInterrupt status (HEX ASCII) <Interrupt Conditions> Switch ON 0: Interrupt prohibited : Interrupt allowed Switch OFF Keypad write & character entry Screen internal switching Switch ON: Interrupt when the switch changes from OFF to ON (only when [Action] of the switch is [Normal], [Block], [+Block], [ Block] or [Mode]) Switch OFF: Interrupt when the switch changes from ON to OFF (only when [Action] of the switch is [Normal], [Block], [+Block], [ Block] or [Mode]) Keypad write: Interrupt when the [ENTER] switch on the keypad is pressed Screen internal switching: Interrupt when the screen changes based on an internal switch * Macro (OUT_ENQ): Interrupt enabled all the time Example: Interrupt settings are shown below. Switch ON: Prohibited Switch OFF: Prohibited Keypad/character entry write: Allowed Screen internal switching: Allowed WI 0C In this case, the data contents are as shown below Host side 0H H 49H 0H 4H 0H H H V series side Switch ON Switch OFF Keypad write & character entry Screen internal switching

334 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- Interrupt Status Read Command Interrupt status read command Interrupt status read command S E S T R I T U X X M Host side V series side HL S T X D a t a E T X S U M HL HL - Host side Interrupt status is read. Data: Interrupt status (HEX ASCII) Switch ON 0: Interrupt prohibited : Interrupt allowed Switch OFF Keypad write & character entry Screen internal switching Example: Interrupt status is read. Switch ON: Switch OFF: Keypad/character entry write: Screen internal switching: Allowed Allowed Prohibited Prohibited In this case, the data contents are as shown below. RI A Host side V series side 0H H 49H 0H 4H 0H Switch ON Switch OFF Keypad write & character entry 0 6 Screen internal switching 0H 0H H 0H 6H H

335 App6-4 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Interrupt (ENQ) When interrupt is used when the connection mode is ( : )*, this code is transmitted. The transmission occurs when a regular key is pressed or when the [ENTER] key is pressed in the entry mode. (For information on interrupt timing, refer to page App6-9.) Interrupt data becomes the contents of write areas n + to n +. (Refer to page App6-.) * For RS-4 (4) -wire connection, interrupts cannot be used. When a regular key is pressed V series side 00 Screen No. SW0 SW ENT0 ENT ENT WORD WORD WORD WORD WORD WORD HL When the [ENTER] switch on the keypad is pressed When the [ENTER] switch on the keypad is pressed V series side 0 Screen No. SW0 SW ENT0 ENT ENT WORD WORD WORD WORD WORD WORD ENT0// is the same as system memory area (n +, n + 6, n + ) HL SCREEN When a screen internal switching occurs SCREEN V series side 0 Screen No. SW0 SW ENT0 ENT ENT WORD WORD WORD WORD WORD WORD HL

336 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- It is possible to use a macro command to initiate an interrupt. There are two ways to use a macro command to transmit data. You can either convert the data into HEX code and transmit it, or you can transmit the data just as it is without converting it. Use the macro command (OUT_ENQ). For details, refer to Chapter in the Reference Manual (Function). Interrupt with a macro command (OUT_ENQ) Word transmission V series side xx 00 Transmission memory address Number of transmission words Word data WORD WORD HL Word transmission Interrupt code (0H to FH) Character transmission V series side xx 0 Transmission memory address Number of transmission characters Word data WORD WORD HL Character transmission Interrupt code (0H to FH)

337 App6-6 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Switch Output (See page App6-, page App6-9 and page App6-4.) When [Output Action] of a switch is set to [Momentary] and [Output Memory] is set in location ($s0-9) of system memory, the following actions occur when the switch is pressed. When the bit memory specified in system memory is set, and the switch is released, it is reset. The switch number that corresponds to the bit is written in write areas n + and n + 4. For the relationship between the bit and the switch number, refer to page App6-4. V series analog type Normally, only one switch can be pressed. (Fixed to output) However, if you go from the menu bar to [System Setting] to [Function Switch Setting] (or if you go from the menu bar to [Edit] to [Local Function Switch Setting]), and check [Use Function Switch], it is possible to press two points ( outputs) at the same time. For output ([Use Function Switch] is not checked), the switch number and switch information are written in n +. For outputs ([Use Function Switch] is checked), the switch number and switch information are written in n + and n+ + 4 when two points are pressed. V series matrix type When you go from the menu bar to [Edit] to [Screen Setting], you can select between output or outputs. For output, the switch number and switch information are written in n +. For outputs, the switch number and switch information are written in n + and n + 4 when switches are pressed simultaneously.

338 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6- The switch number is written in the following way in write areas n + and n + 4. n+, n+4 (SW0/SW) Switch status 0: OFF : ON Switch number When the MONITOUCH is connected to the host in a : connection, interrupt occurs as is shown below. * For RS-4 (4) -wire connection, interrupts cannot be used. When a regular key is pressed V series side 00 Screen No. SW0 SW ENT0 ENT ENT WORD WORD WORD WORD WORD WORD HL NAK Error Codes 0H: The V series is currently engaged in display processing. The received command is on standby due to display processing. Wait a few moments and re-transmit the command. 0H: Overrun/Framing error An overrun or framing error is detected in the received data. Send the command again. 0H: Parity error A parity error is detected in the received data. Send the command again. 04H: Sum check error A sum error occurs with the received data. 0H: Address error The address specified by the memory read/write command is incorrect. Check the address or counter and re-transmit the command. 06H: Count error The memory read/write count is 0. 0H: Screen error The data to be written in read area n + (screen status command), as specified by a write command, is not registered on the screen. Check the screen number and re-transmit the data. 0H: Format error The number of DLEs is 0 or greater than 6.

339 App6- Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications 09H: Received data over The number of write command data received from the host exceeded that of data shown below. Write memory command = words Write CHR command = 04 bytes 0BH: 0FH: Retry command error When a retry command is received, there is no BUSY status (NAK [0]) command. ETX error No ETX code is found. 0H: DLE error There is no DLE code. H: Character error A character not used in the received data is found. (other than 0 to F) Check the character and send the command again. H: Command error An invalid command is given.

340 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6-9 -byte Character Code List SP! " # $ % & ( ) +,. / : ; < = >? A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ ] ^ _ 6 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { } ~ 9 E F A B C D E F A B C D Upper Lower

341 App6-40 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Memory Map Memory Inside the V series, there is internal memory necessary for screen display called user memory ($u), as well as memory that the V series uses for the system called system memory ($s). User Memory ($u) 64 words are available for user memory. This area is usable as desired for screen data. Also the host computer can write to and read from the area. The memory map is as shown below Address 0000 Address 000 Address 000 Address 000 Address 0004 Address 000 Address 0006 User memory (64 words) 6 Address 6 Address 6 Address 69 Address 60 Address 6 Address 6 Address 6

342 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6-4 System Memory ($s) System memory is memory that writes V series action status when the V Series is currently displaying something. With this written information, it is possible to check overlap status, buffer area, printer, backlight, and slave station status in multi-drop connection mode. * System memory cannot be read or written from the host computer. In the table below, a small part ($s0 to 9) of system memory is extracted. For more information on other areas of system memory, refer to Appendix in the Reference Manual (Function). Address Contents : 9 0 Universal serial port switch output 0 Output code 0 - Universal serial port switch output Output code 6 - Universal serial port switch output Output code - 4 Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output 4 Output code 64-9 Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output 6 Output code 96 - Universal serial port switch output Output code - Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output 9 Output code Universal serial port switch output 0 Output code 60-9 Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output Output code Universal serial port switch output Output code 0-94 Universal serial port switch output 4 Output code Universal serial port switch output Output code :

343 App6-4 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Address 000 to 009 The [Output Memory] of a switch is assigned to bits in this area. Set [Output Action] to [Momentary]. When a switch is pressed, bit memory is set to and the corresponding switch number is written in system setting areas n + and n + 4. (Refer to page App6-.) The relationship between the bit and the switch number is shown in the following diagram. For details about the output of a switch, refer to page App6-6. Address 000 Switch number MSB LSB 00 0 Address 00 Switch number MSB LSB 00 6 Address 0090 Switch number MSB LSB Address 0094 Switch number MSB LSB Address 009 Switch number MSB LSB

344 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications App6-4 Switch ON Macro Action The macro command that controls a repeat function in the switch ON macro, as well as the processing sequence, is shown in the following diagram. Switch action flowchart Switch ON No Interlock? Yes Interlock condition? Not satisfied External Lamp Satisfied Buzzer No Yes Lamp ON graphics Buzzer ON Buzzer ON External Lamp Output Internal Lamp ON graphics ON macro Execution Continue ON macro? Yes ON macro No Macro command present End Address 64 to 66 clear Macro command execution NO Address 64 0 Address 6 0 NO Address 66 0 YES YES YES Add repeat function to the switch Suspend repeat function of the switch Repeat macro command NO Switch OFF Switch OFF NO YES YES End

345 App6-44 Appendix 6 Universal Serial Communications Please use this page freely.

346 disc RESET POWER disc RESET SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F Appendix V-Link App- Appendix V-Link V-Link V-Link is the network where the computer reads from and writes to the internal memory of the V series, memory card, PLC memory or temperature control/plc memory using a dedicated protocol. Dedicated commands Read Write PC V series PLC Connection with computer When connecting to the V series or a V06 equipped with DU-0, use the MJ port. For connection to the PLC using a temperature controller or the PLCWay function, use the other MJ port and use CN for communications with the PLC. Data of the PLC or temperature controller can be collected through communications with the V series. Data collection is available even between the products of different manufacturers. When connecting to the V series or a V06 equipped with DU-0, use the MJ port. Either signal level RS-C or RS-4 can be selected. With RS-C, one V series can be connected; with RS-4, a maximum of V series can be connected. <RS-4 connection> RS-4 RS-C RS-4 RS-4 MJ/ MJ MJ Local Port CN Local Port MJ (V06) Local Port CN MJ RS-C RS-4 RS-4 PLC PLC PLC Temperature controller, inverter or PLC

347 App- Appendix V-Link Wiring Cable Use Hakko Electronics cable V6-TMP ( m) for connection with a computer. The shielded cable of V6-TMP is connected to FG (frame ground) when the V series is used and to (signal ground) when the V06 is used. * Notes on Use of V6-TMP There are six wires in the V6-TMP cable as shown on the right. The wires to be used are determined depending on the connecting method. For the wires not used, be sure to properly insulate with tape, etc. V6-TMP Black Green Brown Red Orange Yellow : : : 4 : : : RS-C (V series: set) Computer a V6-TMP RS-C MJ/ V Local port CN PLC RS-C RS-4 RS-4 Wiring example of above (a) Modular jack, -pin * SD RD RD * V6-TMP is connected to FG when the V series is used and to when the V06 is used. Computer D-sub 9-pin (female) SD DR CS 6 RS

348 Appendix V-Link App- RS-4 (V series: maximum sets) Computer a b V6-TMP RS-C RS-4 conversion Terminal block Terminal block Terminal block } * } * } *} MJ/ MJ/ MJ/ V Local Port V Local Port V Local Port RS-4 CN CN CN PLC PLC PLC RS-C RS-4 RS-4 * 0. m recommended (.0 m maximum) Wiring example of above (a) and (b) RS-4 Terminal block Terminal block FG FG FG a b V series Modular jack, -pin * * + V series Modular jack, -pin + * V6-TMP is connected to FG when the V series is used and to when the V06 is used.

349 App-4 Appendix V-Link V-SFT Setting The V-SFT settings required for V-Link are explained. V-Link Setting. Click [System Setting] [V-Link Setting].. The [V-Link Setting] dialog is displayed.. Check [ Use MJ Port as V-Link] and make the setting for communications between the V series and the computer. [Refer to Modular] Select the modular jack to be used. Modular Jack /Modular Jack [Baud Rate] 400 / 9600 / 900 / 400 / 600 / k bps [Local Port] ( to ) Set the port number of the V series. [Send Delay Time] (msec) Set a time delay in sending a response after receipt of data. [Parity] None/Odd/Even [ Level] RS-C / RS-4 With RS-C, one V series can be connected; with RS-4, a maximum of V series can be connected. [Data Length] -bit/-bit [Stop Bit] -bit/-bit [Use Sum Check] Check this option when using a sum check. [Add CR/LF] Check this option when adding CR/LF.

350 Appendix V-Link App- Protocol Read (with sum check and CR/LF) Read command Command S T X V local No. Read command Number of words to read * Read target memory setting E T X S C U M R L F Bytes Response (Normal communication) S T X V local No. A C K Memory data 0 Memory data n E T X S C U M R L F 4 4 Bytes (When an error occurs) S T X V local No. N A K E T X S C U M R L F Bytes * Read target memory setting V internal memory PLC memory within 6 bits Temperature cotrol/ PLC memory within 6 bits PLC memory over 6 bits Temperature cotrol/ PLC memory over 6 bits Memory card Model Address Type Reserved for system Model Address Type Expansion code Reserved for system Station Number (in [n:] connection) Reserved for system Model Expansion code Address Type Reserved for system Station Number (in [n:] connection) File No. Model Address Record No. Reserved for system Bytes e.g. Reads the -word data, "ABCD" starting with the address $u000(004h) on the V of the station number. Command S T X V local No. Read command Number of words Model Type Address Reserved for system to read E T X S U M C L R F 0H 0H 0H 00H 00H 004H H FH 0H 0HH H0H 0HH 0H0H 0H0H 0H0HH4H 0H0H0H0H0H0H0H0H0H0H 0H H46H 0DH 0AH Response (Normal communication) S T X V local No. 0H A C K 00H B A D C 4H Data 4H 44H 4H E T X S U M 60H 0H 0HH 0H0H 4HH 4HH 4H4H 4HH 0H 6H0H 0DH 0AH C R L F

351 App-6 Appendix V-Link Write (with sum check and CR/LF) Write command Command S T X V local No. Number Write of words command to write * Write target memory setting Memory data 0 Memory data n E T X S C U M R L F 4 4 Bytes Response (Normal communication) S T X V local No. A C K E T X S C U M R L F Bytes (When an error occurs) S T X V local No. N A K E T X S C U M R L F Bytes * Write target memory setting V internal memory PLC memory within 6 bits Temperature cotrol/ PLC memory within 6 bits PLC memory over 6 bits Temperature cotrol/ PLC memory over 6 bits Memory card Model Address Type Reserved for system Model Address Type Expansion code Reserved for system Station Number (in [n:] connection) Reserved for system Model Expansion code Address Type Reserved for system Station Number (in [n:] connection) File No. Model Address Record No. Reserved for system Bytes e.g. Writes "AB" to the addresses D000 to 0(0064 to 006H) on the PLC connected to the V of the station number. Command S T X V local No. 0H 0H 0HH Write command H HH Number of words to write 0H 0HH Model Type Address Reserved for system 0H 00H 0064H 0HH 0H0H 0H0H6H4H H B A 4H Data 4H H H AH 0H0H0H0H0H0H0H0H0H0H 4HH 4HH HH HH 0H H4H 0DH 0AH E T X S U M C R L F Response (Normal communication) S T X V local No. A C K E T X S U M C R L F 0H 00H C6H 0H 0HH 0H0H 0H 4H6H 0DH 0AH

352 Appendix V-Link App- Data Items for Protocols Transmission control code: byte V port number: bytes Port numbers are used so that the host computer can identify each V series for access. The data range is from 0H to FH ( to ) and is converted into the ASCII code before use. The port number of the V series should be set on the V-SFT editor. (Refer to V-SFT Setting. ) Command: bytes Available commands are shown below. The number of words to be read or written: bytes Set the number of words to be read or written by one command. The data range is from 0H to FFH ( to ) and is converted into the ASCII code before use. Memory address to be read or written: bytes Specify the memory address to be accessed. Set the following code in the format as shown for Read target memory setting on page App- and Write target memory setting on page App-6. - Model - Type Code (Hexadecimal) Contents STX 0H Start of transmission block ETX 0H End of transmission block CR 0DH Carriage return LF 0AH Line feed Code (Hexadecimal) ASCII Contents Read 0H 0 Read from memory Write H Write to memory Code (Hexadecimal) ASCII V series internal memory 00H 00 0 to 6 0H 0 PLC memory 66 and above H Memory card 0H 0 Temperature control/plc memory V internal memory PLC memory Temperature control/ PLC memory - Address Specify the memory address to be accessed. 0 to 6 0H 0 66 and above H Type Code (Hexadecimal) ASCII $u (user memory) 00H 00 $s (system memory) 0H 0 $L (non-volatile word memory) 0H 0 $LD (non-volatile double-word memory) 0H 0 $T (temporary user memory) 04H 04 Depends on the PLC to be used. Set the type number indicated for Available Memory of respective PLCs on Chapter to Chapter. Depends on the PLC to be connected to the temperature controller and PLC function. Set the type number indicated for Available Memory of respective temperature controllers on the Temperature Control Network Manual. Set the type number indicated for Available Memory of respective PLCs on Chapter to Chapter when using the PLCWay function.

353 App- Appendix V-Link - Expansion code Set the slot number of the CPU memory of the MITSUBISHI PLC or the CPU number of the Yokogawa PLC. Example: MITSUBISHI Slot No. 0: 00H MITSUBISHI Slot No. : 0H Yokogawa CPU No. : 00H Yokogawa CPU No. : 0H * If no expansion code or port number is required, enter 00 (= 00 in the ASCII code). - Port number :, Multi-link...Not used Multi-drop...PLC port number Temperature controller...temperature controller port number - File No. Specify the file number set in the [Memory Card Setting] dialog of the V-SFT editor. - Record No. Specify the record number set in the [Memory Card Setting] dialog of the V-SFT editor. - System reserved Enter 0 (= 0 in the ASCII code) for the number of bytes. The number of bytes for system reserved varies depending on the model. Example: Model Bytes Code (Hexadecimal) ASCII V internal memory H Sum Check Code (SUM): bytes Data is added up (SUM), and the lower one byte ( bits) of the sum is converted into the -digit ASCII code (hexadecimal). A sum check code is shown below. Example: Transmission mode: without CR/LF, with sum check Command: 0 (data read) Address: 0 words from $u000 (0EH) When reading, a sum check will be performed as shown below. STX V port number Command Read words Memory model Memory type Address System reserved ETX SUM 0H 0H 0AH 00H 00H 0EH H B9H 0H 0HH H0H 0H4H 0H0H 0H0H 0H H 4H H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 0H 4H9H 0H + 0H + H + H + 0H + 0H + 4H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H + H + 4H + H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H + 0H = 4B9H Response Code: bytes [ACK] This code is received at normal termination. 00H (00: ASCII) [NAK] This code is received at abnormal termination. (ASCII) For more information, refer to page App-9.

354 Appendix V-Link App-9 NAK: Error Codes 0H: Overrun/Framing error An overrun or framing error is detected in the received data. Send the command again. 0H: Parity error A parity error is detected in the received data. Send the command again. 04H: Sum check error A sum error occurs with the received data. 06H: Count error The memory read/write count is 0. 0FH: ETX error No ETX code is found. H: Character error A character not used in the received data is found. (other than 0 to F) Check the character and send the command again. H: Command error An invalid command is given. H: Memory setting error The address or device number is invalid.

355 App-0 Appendix V-Link -byte Character Code List SP! " # $ % & ( ) +,. / : ; < = >? A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ ] ^ _ 6 a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { } ~ 9 E F A B C D E F A B C D Upper Lower

356 disc RESET POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F MELSEC Appendix Ladder Transfer Function App- Appendix Ladder Transfer Function Up until now it has been necessary to debug the data by repeatedly disconnecting and reconnecting the two computer-plc and V-PLC cables when the V series is directly connected to a PLC equipped with only one CPU port. With the ladder transfer function, however, it is possible to write ladder programs or monitor the PLC memory using the V series without disconnecting and reconnecting the cables. Applicable PLCs Connection The following PLC models support the ladder transfer function. Manufacturer Select PLC Type CPU Fuji Electric MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC OMRON Yokogawa Electric SPB (N mode) and FLEX-PC CPU Refer to page -. Ladder Communication Program FlexCpu.lcm QnH (Q) series CPU Q0(H), 06H MelQHCpQ.lcm QnH (Q) series link Q00, Q0 MelQnA.lcm FX series CPU FX/, FX0N FXN series CPU FXN/N, FXNC MelFx.lcm FXS series CPU FXS SYSMAC C SYSMAC CS/CJ FA-M FA-MR Refer to page 9-. Refer to page -. Sysmac.lcm Yokogawa.lcm * : n communication (multi-drop), multi-link communication, and multi-link communication cannot be executed. Use Hakko Electronics V6-CP cable when connecting the computer and the V series (MJ/). When connecting the V series (CN) to the PLC, use a : communication cable as previously described. When the computer is equipped with one COM port: GPPW (V-SFT) COM V6-CP MJ V : communication cable CN CPU port Computer (PC) V series PLC Communications between the PLC programming software and the PLC Communications between the V-SFT editor and V Communications between V and the PLC It is not possible to transfer both V-SFT screen data and PLC programming software at the same time. Stop either transfer. Screen data transfer from the V-SFT editor is carried out via MJ. The use of MJ is recommended if executing both the ladder transfer function and screen data transfer is necessary. In this case, screen data transfer via the V6-CP cable is possible through the Main Menu screen displayed on the V. For more information, refer to page App-.

357 disc RESET POWER SYSTEM F F F F4 F F6 F MELSEC App- Appendix Ladder Transfer Function When the computer is equipped with two COM ports and two V6-CP cables are used: GPPW (V-SFT) COM V6-CP MJ V CN : communication cable CPU port Computer (PC) COM V6-CP MJ V series PLC Communications between the PLC programming software and the PLC Communications between the V-SFT editor and V Communications between V and the PLC Setting Different COM ports and V6-CP cables are used respectively for transferring the V-SFT editor data and the PLC programming software. However, it is not possible to transfer both at the same time.. PLC type setting Select [PLC Type] from the [System Setting] menu. Select a type adapted to the ladder transfer function (page App-) in the [Select PLC Type] dialog.. Modular jack setting Select [Modular Jack] from the [System Setting] menu. Select [Ladder Tool] for [Modular Jack ] or [Modular Jack ] in the [Modular Jack] dialog.. Environment setting From the [System Setting] menu, select [Unit Setting] and open the [Environment Setting] tab window. The [Ladder communication is not used in Local mode.] option is relevant to the operation that will take place while the Main Menu screen is displayed. - Unchecked: Transferring the V-SFT editor data or the PLC programming software is possible. Choose either transfer using the F switch. - Checked: Transferring only the V-SFT editor data is possible. Transferring the PLC programming software is disabled.

358 Appendix Ladder Transfer Function App- Different V operations depending on item settings ( and in the previous section) Depending on which items are selected in the [Modular Jack] dialog and the [Environment Setting] tab window, operations possible on the V (communication with the computer enabled/disabled) are determined. Editor port Modular Jack V-SFT Setting Environment Setting MJ MJ Check Other than editor port and ladder tool Ladder tool Ladder tool Other than ladder tool Unchecked Checked Unchecked Checked Ladder transfer V Status * Screen data transfer via LAN/USB is possible, irrespective of setting differences. * Switching on the Main Menu screen Press the SYSTEM and F switches. The Main Menu screen is displayed. RUN Transferring screen data MJ * Main Menu Screen Ladder transfer Transferring screen data MJ * Unchecked * * Checked S Y S Y Main Menu V 0 i T D ::0 S T E M M OD E S T E M M OD E System Information SYSTEM PROG. VER..000 FONT VER..00 /.000 /.000 ENGLISH I/F DRV VER..40 MELSEC QnH Q CPU Port BR BR BR BR Screen Data Information Size : PLC Type : MITSUBISHIQnH(Q) series CPU Comment : Error : Stop Time-Out:.00 sec Retry: BR B A C K BR B A C K Connection: : Level: RSC PLC Stat. No.: 0 Baud Rate:900 Data Length : Stop Bit: Parity: Odd Send Delay: 0msec L T L T Editor:--- Ethernet Information Trans.Speed: 0BASE-T Stat. No. : PORT: 0000 MAC: 000FF0000 SRAM/Clock Extension Ethernet Card I/O Test Menu Editor:--- appears, indicating the ladder transfer mode, in the lower left corner of the screen. At this time, screen data transfer via MJ is not possible as shown below. Display Editor: --- Editor: MJ Ladder Transfer Transferring Screen Data MJ

359 App-4 Appendix Ladder Transfer Function Use the F switch to switch between Editor:--- and Editor:MJ displayed on the screen. Hold down the switch for seconds or more. Main Menu V 0 i T D ::0 Main Menu V 0 i T D ::0 System Information SYSTEM PROG. VER..000 FONT VER..00 /.000 /.000 ENGLISH I/F DRV VER..40 MELSEC QnH Q CPU Port System Information SYSTEM PROG. VER..000 FONT VER..00 /.000 /.000 ENGLISH I/F DRV VER..40 MELSEC QnH Q CPU Port Screen Data Information Size : PLC Type : MITSUBISHIQnH(Q) series CPU Comment : Error : Stop Time-Out:.00 sec Retry: Screen Data Information Size : PLC Type : MITSUBISHIQnH(Q) series CPU Comment : Error : Stop Time-Out:.00 sec Retry: Connection: : Level: RSC PLC Stat. No.: 0 Baud Rate:900 Data Length : Stop Bit: Parity: Odd Send Delay: 0msec Connection: : Level: RSC PLC Stat. No.: 0 Baud Rate:900 Data Length : Stop Bit: Parity: Odd Send Delay: 0msec Editor:--- Ethernet Information Trans.Speed: 0BASE-T Stat. No. : PORT: 0000 MAC: 000FF0000 SRAM/Clock Extension Ethernet Card I/O Test Menu Editor:MJ Ethernet Information Trans.Speed: 0BASE-T Stat. No. : PORT: 0000 MAC: 000FF0000 SRAM/Clock Extension Ethernet Card I/O Test Menu Hold down for seconds. Hold down for seconds. * Since V609E is not equipped with function switches, switching between Editor:--- and Editor:MJ on the Main Menu screen is not possible. Therefore, check [Ladder communication is not used in Local mode.]. At this time, check the system program version and update it if the version is old before transferring the screen data. (adapted to V-SFT editor version or later, V system program version.00 or later, and V6 system program version.0 or later) Notes on Ladder Transfer Function On-line editing between the V-SFT editor and the V series is not possible. If attempted, communications between the PLC programming software and the PLC will not be performed correctly. Communicating statuses with the PLC programming software and the PLC during communications between the V-SFT editor and the V series V-SFT Writing to V Reading from V Comparing with V PLC Programming Software Communications disconnected (normal communications on completion of writing) Normal communications Normal communications Baud rate setting The [Baud Rate] setting in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog applies to the baud rate between the V series and the PLC. However, if communication with the PLC programming software (monitoring, etc.) starts by means of the ladder transfer function, the baud rate set on the software takes effect. The baud rate stays enabled until the V series is turned off and on again. Keeping this in mind, set the PLC programming software baud rate and the [Baud Rate] in the [Comm. Parameter] dialog to the same value. With [Ladder Tool] checked in the [Modular Jack] dialog, it is prohibited to register the devices to be monitored for V-PLC communication even though the PLC programming software is not started. The screen display speed will decrease somewhat accordingly. Also, when the ladder program is transferred in the RUN mode of the V series, communications are synchronized; therefore, the performance of both the V series and the PLC programming software decreases.

360 Appendix Ladder Transfer Function App- Ladder Communication Program If using the ladder communication function, the V series requires the ladder communication program. Normally when screen data is transferred, the program is also transferred. To transfer the ladder communication program only, follow the procedure described below.. Select [Ladder com. prg.] in the [Transfer] dialog, and click [PC->].. The dialog box below is displayed. Select the ladder communication program that corresponds to the PLC model (refer to page App-) and click the [Open] button. Program transfer to the V series starts.